WO2009151695A1 - Compounds and method for reducing uric acid - Google Patents

Compounds and method for reducing uric acid Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2009151695A1
WO2009151695A1 PCT/US2009/037128 US2009037128W WO2009151695A1 WO 2009151695 A1 WO2009151695 A1 WO 2009151695A1 US 2009037128 W US2009037128 W US 2009037128W WO 2009151695 A1 WO2009151695 A1 WO 2009151695A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
phenyl
compound
formula
acid
dimethylbenzyloxy
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2009/037128
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2009151695A4 (en
Inventor
James Dennen O'neil
Michael K. Bamat
Reid W. Von Borstel
Shalini Sharma
Ramachandran Arudchandran
Original Assignee
Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority to JP2010550897A priority Critical patent/JP5339545B2/en
Priority to UAA201012059A priority patent/UA103894C2/en
Application filed by Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation filed Critical Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation
Priority to CN200980108707.1A priority patent/CN101969773B/en
Priority to CA2716860A priority patent/CA2716860C/en
Priority to US12/920,555 priority patent/US8829058B2/en
Priority to BRPI0924547-2A priority patent/BRPI0924547B1/en
Priority to KR1020107021875A priority patent/KR101677944B1/en
Priority to AU2009258040A priority patent/AU2009258040B8/en
Priority to MX2010009959A priority patent/MX2010009959A/en
Priority to BRPI0909299-4A priority patent/BRPI0909299B1/en
Priority to MX2013011790A priority patent/MX342806B/en
Priority to NZ587433A priority patent/NZ587433A/en
Priority to EP09762990.1A priority patent/EP2268141B1/en
Priority to RU2010141823/15A priority patent/RU2501554C2/en
Priority to KR1020147023462A priority patent/KR101677945B1/en
Priority to DK09762990.1T priority patent/DK2268141T3/en
Priority to EP19158335.0A priority patent/EP3517109A1/en
Priority to ES09762990T priority patent/ES2741153T3/en
Publication of WO2009151695A1 publication Critical patent/WO2009151695A1/en
Publication of WO2009151695A4 publication Critical patent/WO2009151695A4/en
Priority to ZA2010/05872A priority patent/ZA201005872B/en
Priority to IL208004A priority patent/IL208004A/en
Priority to US13/890,789 priority patent/US9115072B2/en
Priority to IL247136A priority patent/IL247136B/en

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C59/00—Compounds having carboxyl groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms and containing any of the groups OH, O—metal, —CHO, keto, ether, groups, groups, or groups
    • C07C59/40—Unsaturated compounds
    • C07C59/58—Unsaturated compounds containing ether groups, groups, groups, or groups
    • C07C59/64—Unsaturated compounds containing ether groups, groups, groups, or groups containing six-membered aromatic rings
    • C07C59/66—Unsaturated compounds containing ether groups, groups, groups, or groups containing six-membered aromatic rings the non-carboxylic part of the ether containing six-membered aromatic rings
    • C07C59/68—Unsaturated compounds containing ether groups, groups, groups, or groups containing six-membered aromatic rings the non-carboxylic part of the ether containing six-membered aromatic rings the oxygen atom of the ether group being bound to a non-condensed six-membered aromatic ring
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A23—FOODS OR FOODSTUFFS; TREATMENT THEREOF, NOT COVERED BY OTHER CLASSES
    • A23G—COCOA; COCOA PRODUCTS, e.g. CHOCOLATE; SUBSTITUTES FOR COCOA OR COCOA PRODUCTS; CONFECTIONERY; CHEWING GUM; ICE-CREAM; PREPARATION THEREOF
    • A23G3/00—Sweetmeats; Confectionery; Marzipan; Coated or filled products
    • A23G3/34—Sweetmeats, confectionery or marzipan; Processes for the preparation thereof
    • A23G3/36—Sweetmeats, confectionery or marzipan; Processes for the preparation thereof characterised by the composition containing organic or inorganic compounds
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A23—FOODS OR FOODSTUFFS; TREATMENT THEREOF, NOT COVERED BY OTHER CLASSES
    • A23G—COCOA; COCOA PRODUCTS, e.g. CHOCOLATE; SUBSTITUTES FOR COCOA OR COCOA PRODUCTS; CONFECTIONERY; CHEWING GUM; ICE-CREAM; PREPARATION THEREOF
    • A23G3/00—Sweetmeats; Confectionery; Marzipan; Coated or filled products
    • A23G3/34—Sweetmeats, confectionery or marzipan; Processes for the preparation thereof
    • A23G3/36—Sweetmeats, confectionery or marzipan; Processes for the preparation thereof characterised by the composition containing organic or inorganic compounds
    • A23G3/38—Sucrose-free products
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A23—FOODS OR FOODSTUFFS; TREATMENT THEREOF, NOT COVERED BY OTHER CLASSES
    • A23G—COCOA; COCOA PRODUCTS, e.g. CHOCOLATE; SUBSTITUTES FOR COCOA OR COCOA PRODUCTS; CONFECTIONERY; CHEWING GUM; ICE-CREAM; PREPARATION THEREOF
    • A23G3/00—Sweetmeats; Confectionery; Marzipan; Coated or filled products
    • A23G3/34—Sweetmeats, confectionery or marzipan; Processes for the preparation thereof
    • A23G3/36—Sweetmeats, confectionery or marzipan; Processes for the preparation thereof characterised by the composition containing organic or inorganic compounds
    • A23G3/42—Sweetmeats, confectionery or marzipan; Processes for the preparation thereof characterised by the composition containing organic or inorganic compounds characterised by the carbohydrates used, e.g. polysaccharides
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A23—FOODS OR FOODSTUFFS; TREATMENT THEREOF, NOT COVERED BY OTHER CLASSES
    • A23G—COCOA; COCOA PRODUCTS, e.g. CHOCOLATE; SUBSTITUTES FOR COCOA OR COCOA PRODUCTS; CONFECTIONERY; CHEWING GUM; ICE-CREAM; PREPARATION THEREOF
    • A23G3/00—Sweetmeats; Confectionery; Marzipan; Coated or filled products
    • A23G3/34—Sweetmeats, confectionery or marzipan; Processes for the preparation thereof
    • A23G3/36—Sweetmeats, confectionery or marzipan; Processes for the preparation thereof characterised by the composition containing organic or inorganic compounds
    • A23G3/48—Sweetmeats, confectionery or marzipan; Processes for the preparation thereof characterised by the composition containing organic or inorganic compounds containing plants or parts thereof, e.g. fruits, seeds, extracts
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A23—FOODS OR FOODSTUFFS; TREATMENT THEREOF, NOT COVERED BY OTHER CLASSES
    • A23G—COCOA; COCOA PRODUCTS, e.g. CHOCOLATE; SUBSTITUTES FOR COCOA OR COCOA PRODUCTS; CONFECTIONERY; CHEWING GUM; ICE-CREAM; PREPARATION THEREOF
    • A23G3/00—Sweetmeats; Confectionery; Marzipan; Coated or filled products
    • A23G3/34—Sweetmeats, confectionery or marzipan; Processes for the preparation thereof
    • A23G3/50—Sweetmeats, confectionery or marzipan; Processes for the preparation thereof characterised by shape, structure or physical form, e.g. products with supported structure
    • A23G3/56—Products with edible or inedible supports, e.g. lollipops
    • A23G3/563—Products with edible or inedible supports, e.g. lollipops products with an inedible support, e.g. a stick
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/185—Acids; Anhydrides, halides or salts thereof, e.g. sulfur acids, imidic, hydrazonic or hydroximic acids
    • A61K31/19—Carboxylic acids, e.g. valproic acid
    • A61K31/192—Carboxylic acids, e.g. valproic acid having aromatic groups, e.g. sulindac, 2-aryl-propionic acids, ethacrynic acid 
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/21—Esters, e.g. nitroglycerine, selenocyanates
    • A61K31/215—Esters, e.g. nitroglycerine, selenocyanates of carboxylic acids
    • A61K31/216—Esters, e.g. nitroglycerine, selenocyanates of carboxylic acids of acids having aromatic rings, e.g. benactizyne, clofibrate
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/335—Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin
    • A61K31/35—Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin having six-membered rings with one oxygen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/352—Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin having six-membered rings with one oxygen as the only ring hetero atom condensed with carbocyclic rings, e.g. methantheline 
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K45/00—Medicinal preparations containing active ingredients not provided for in groups A61K31/00 - A61K41/00
    • A61K45/06—Mixtures of active ingredients without chemical characterisation, e.g. antiphlogistics and cardiaca
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K8/00—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations
    • A61K8/18—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition
    • A61K8/30—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds
    • A61K8/49—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds containing heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K8/4973—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds containing heterocyclic compounds with oxygen as the only hetero atom
    • A61K8/498—Cosmetics or similar toiletry preparations characterised by the composition containing organic compounds containing heterocyclic compounds with oxygen as the only hetero atom having 6-membered rings or their condensed derivatives, e.g. coumarin
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K9/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
    • A61K9/0012—Galenical forms characterised by the site of application
    • A61K9/0053—Mouth and digestive tract, i.e. intraoral and peroral administration
    • A61K9/0056—Mouth soluble or dispersible forms; Suckable, eatable, chewable coherent forms; Forms rapidly disintegrating in the mouth; Lozenges; Lollipops; Bite capsules; Baked products; Baits or other oral forms for animals
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P13/00—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system
    • A61P13/04—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system for urolithiasis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/06—Antigout agents, e.g. antihyperuricemic or uricosuric agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61Q—SPECIFIC USE OF COSMETICS OR SIMILAR TOILETRY PREPARATIONS
    • A61Q11/00—Preparations for care of the teeth, of the oral cavity or of dentures; Dentifrices, e.g. toothpastes; Mouth rinses
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C59/00—Compounds having carboxyl groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms and containing any of the groups OH, O—metal, —CHO, keto, ether, groups, groups, or groups
    • C07C59/40—Unsaturated compounds
    • C07C59/58—Unsaturated compounds containing ether groups, groups, groups, or groups
    • C07C59/64—Unsaturated compounds containing ether groups, groups, groups, or groups containing six-membered aromatic rings
    • C07C59/66—Unsaturated compounds containing ether groups, groups, groups, or groups containing six-membered aromatic rings the non-carboxylic part of the ether containing six-membered aromatic rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C59/00—Compounds having carboxyl groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms and containing any of the groups OH, O—metal, —CHO, keto, ether, groups, groups, or groups
    • C07C59/40—Unsaturated compounds
    • C07C59/76—Unsaturated compounds containing keto groups
    • C07C59/84—Unsaturated compounds containing keto groups containing six membered aromatic rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C59/00—Compounds having carboxyl groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms and containing any of the groups OH, O—metal, —CHO, keto, ether, groups, groups, or groups
    • C07C59/40—Unsaturated compounds
    • C07C59/76—Unsaturated compounds containing keto groups
    • C07C59/88—Unsaturated compounds containing keto groups containing halogen
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C59/00—Compounds having carboxyl groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms and containing any of the groups OH, O—metal, —CHO, keto, ether, groups, groups, or groups
    • C07C59/40—Unsaturated compounds
    • C07C59/76—Unsaturated compounds containing keto groups
    • C07C59/90—Unsaturated compounds containing keto groups containing singly bound oxygen-containing groups
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C61/00—Compounds having carboxyl groups bound to carbon atoms of rings other than six-membered aromatic rings
    • C07C61/16—Unsaturated compounds
    • C07C61/39—Unsaturated compounds containing six-membered aromatic rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C69/00—Esters of carboxylic acids; Esters of carbonic or haloformic acids
    • C07C69/66—Esters of carboxylic acids having esterified carboxylic groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms and having any of the groups OH, O—metal, —CHO, keto, ether, acyloxy, groups, groups, or in the acid moiety
    • C07C69/67—Esters of carboxylic acids having esterified carboxylic groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms and having any of the groups OH, O—metal, —CHO, keto, ether, acyloxy, groups, groups, or in the acid moiety of saturated acids
    • C07C69/716—Esters of keto-carboxylic acids or aldehydo-carboxylic acids
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C69/00—Esters of carboxylic acids; Esters of carbonic or haloformic acids
    • C07C69/66—Esters of carboxylic acids having esterified carboxylic groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms and having any of the groups OH, O—metal, —CHO, keto, ether, acyloxy, groups, groups, or in the acid moiety
    • C07C69/73—Esters of carboxylic acids having esterified carboxylic groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms and having any of the groups OH, O—metal, —CHO, keto, ether, acyloxy, groups, groups, or in the acid moiety of unsaturated acids
    • C07C69/734—Ethers
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C69/00—Esters of carboxylic acids; Esters of carbonic or haloformic acids
    • C07C69/66—Esters of carboxylic acids having esterified carboxylic groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms and having any of the groups OH, O—metal, —CHO, keto, ether, acyloxy, groups, groups, or in the acid moiety
    • C07C69/73—Esters of carboxylic acids having esterified carboxylic groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms and having any of the groups OH, O—metal, —CHO, keto, ether, acyloxy, groups, groups, or in the acid moiety of unsaturated acids
    • C07C69/738—Esters of keto-carboxylic acids or aldehydo-carboxylic acids
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C2601/00—Systems containing only non-condensed rings
    • C07C2601/02—Systems containing only non-condensed rings with a three-membered ring

Definitions

  • uric acid Diseases caused by elevated levels of uric acid fall into two major categories: disorders caused by precipitation of uric acid crystals and diseases related to pathological effects of soluble uric acid. Gouty arthritis is the classic example of the former. Deposition of urate crystals in the kidney is also a common cause of renal dysfunction. Elevated levels of soluble uric acid are associated with a variety of disorders, including cardiovascular and renal diseases.
  • Gout is most commonly manifested as inflammation of one or more of the joints in the body resulting in mild to severe pain. These events may be episodic and/or chronic. Over time gout can result in the destruction of cartilage and bone, development of uric acid crystal deposits, kidney pain and dysfunction as well as kidney stones. Gout can affect other organs as well.
  • Gout is caused by hyperuricemia and the consequent formation and deposition of uric acid crystals in tissues, joints, kidneys and other organs.
  • the uric acid comes from normal cell metabolism and from some types of foods and beverages.
  • the excessive levels of uric acid are the result of too much uric acid production, impaired clearance by the kidneys (or a combination of excess production and impaired clearance), and also by some forms of medications taken for other health conditions.
  • examples include diuretics, pyrazinamide, cyclosporine, low-dose aspirin, nicotinic acid and levodopa.).
  • Gout is generally divided into four categories based upon progressively more severe symptoms:
  • Acute gouty arthritis Sudden onset of symptoms, often in a single joint (commonly a big toe), and then involving other joints. Symptoms include pain, swelling, redness and fever.
  • Chronic tophaceous gout A chronic condition that may include frequent attacks, constant mild pain and inflammation of joints, destruction of cartilage and bone, development of uric acid crystal deposits, kidney dysfunction and kidney stones.
  • Medications currently used to treat the acute symptoms of gout include nonsteroidal antiinflammatory drugs, colchicine and corticosteroids. All of these medications can produce mild to severe side effects. Other treatments for these acute symptoms are being studied, including antibodies and antagonists to inflammatory cytokines such as Interleukin 1.
  • xanthine oxidase inhibitors for example, allopurinol
  • uricosuric agents for example, sulfinpyrazone, probenecid, benzbromarone and losartan
  • URATl uric acid transporter 1
  • Probenicid and benzbromarone have been taken off the market in a number of countries due to undesirable side effects, such as liver failure in the case of benzbromarone. Patient compliance in taking these drugs is reportedly very poor (A. A. Reidel et al. "Compliance with Allopurinol Therapy among Managed Care Enrollees with Gout: A Retrospective Analysis of Administrative Claims.” Journal of Rheumatology 2004; 31 :1575-1581), presumably because of the side effects and/or lack of benefit.
  • Hyperuricemia and gout are particularly significant issues in organ transplant recipients (Stamp, L., et al, "Gout in solid organ transplantation: a challenging clinical problem", Drugs (2005) 65(18): 2593-2611).
  • Uric acid is often elevated in patients with renal transplants, and common immunosupressive drugs such as cyclosporine can cause particularly severe hyperuricemia.
  • allopurinol is contra-indicated due to interactions with some immunosupressants such as azathioprine, and due to bone marrow failure caused by the combination.
  • elevated uric acid may contribute to graft failure (Armstrong, K.A.
  • Elevated soluble uric acid is also associated with or directly induces inflammatory responses.
  • uric acid is transported into vascular smooth muscle cells via organic acid transporters, especially the urate tranporter URATl , and then stimulates vascular smooth muscle cells to produce C-reactive protein, MCP-I and other cytokines, thereby stimulating proliferation and other changes associated with atherosclerosis (Price et al., Human vascular smooth muscle cells express a urate transporter. J Am Soc Nephrol. 17(7): 1791-5, 2006; Kang et al., Uric acid causes vascular smooth muscle cell proliferation by entering cells via a functional urate transporter. Am J Nephrol.
  • Interleukin 18 and other inflammatory agents reflect local inflammation associated with gout and that urate crystals accelerate activation of IL-18
  • T. Inokuchi et al. Plasma IL-18 and other inflammatory cytokines in patients with gouty arthritis and monosodium urate monohydrate crystal-induced secretion of IL-18. Cytokine. 33(1): 21-27, 206), which appears to have a causative role in renal failure.
  • IL-18 and other cytokines are also significantly elevated in people who do not have gout per se but who merely have elevated uric acid levels (C. Ruggiero et al. Uric acid and inflammatory markers. (C. Ruggiero et al., Uric acid and inflammatory markers. European Heart Journal. 27: 1174- 1181, 2006)
  • Hyperuricemia is also associated with cognitive impairment and other forms of central nervous system dysfunction.
  • Stretlen, D.J. et al. "Serum Uric Acid and Cognitive Function in Community-Dwelling Older Adults", Neuropsychology (Jan. 2007) 21(1): 136-140; Watanabe, S., et al., "Cerebral Oxidative Stress and Mitochondrial Dysfunction in Oxonate-Induced Hyperuricemic Mice", J. Health Science (2006) 52: 730-737).
  • Elevated serum uric acid levels are also associated with increased risk of cancer and cancer mortality.
  • Elevated levels of uric acid are associated with prediabetes, insulin resistance, the development of Type 2 diabetes, and an increased probability of a variety of undesirable conditions in people with diabetes, such as peripheral artery disease, strokes, and increased mortality risk, (Ioachimescu, A. G. et al. (2007) Serum uric acid, mortality and glucose control in patients with Type 2 diabetes mellitus: a PreCIS database study Diabet. Med. 24 (12) 1369-1374; Perry, I.J. et al (1995) Prospective study of risk factors for development of non-insulin dependent diabetes in middle aged British men BMJ 310 (6979) 560-564; Chien, K-L et al.
  • Elevated levels of uric acid are a defining feature of Lesch-Nyhan Syndrome. People with sleep apnea or sleep-disordered breathing also have elevated of uric acid (Saito, H. et al., Tissue hypoxia in sleep apnea syndrome assessed by uric acid and adenosine. Chest 122: 1686-1694, 2002; Verhulst, S. L., et al., Sleep-disordered breathing and uric acid in overweight and obese children and adolescents. Chest 132: 76-80, 2007)
  • Elevated uric acid is associated with preeclampsia (Bainbridge, S.A. and Roberts, J.M., Uric acid as a pathogenic factor in preeclampsia. Placenta Dec. 17 2007 epub ahead of print).
  • preeclampsia Boinbridge, S.A. and Roberts, J.M., Uric acid as a pathogenic factor in preeclampsia. Placenta Dec. 17 2007 epub ahead of print.
  • This invention concerns certain therapeutic uses of a Compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • m is 0, 1 , 2, 3 or 4; n is 0 or 1 ; m + n is not more than 4; t is 0 or 1; q is 0 or 1; and r is 0, 1 or 2.
  • R 6 is hydrogen, methyl or ethyl and R 12 is hydrogen or methyl, or R 6 is hydroxy and R 12 is hydrogen, or R 6 is O and R 12 is absent, or R 6 and R 12 together are -CH 2 CH 2 - .
  • R 7 is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • One of R 8 and R 9 is alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and the other is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • R 10 is hydrogen, halo, alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • X is C(O) and r is 0 and t is 0; or X is NH(R 11 ) wherein R 11 hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • A is phenyl, unsubstituted or substituted by 1 or 2 groups selected from halo, hydroxy, methyl, ethyl, perfluoromethyl, methoxy, ethoxy, and perfluoromethoxy; or a 5 or 6 membered heteroaromatic ring having 1 or 2 ring heteroatoms selected from N, S and O and the heteroaromatic ring is covalently bound to the remainder of the compound of Formula I by a ring carbon; or cycloalkyl having from 3 to 6 ring carbon atoms wherein the cycloalkyl is unsubstituted or one or two ring carbons are independently monosubstituted by methyl or ethyl.
  • Esters and other prodrugs of compounds of Formula I are also included in this invention.
  • This invention provides a method of reducing the uric acid concentration in blood of, or increasing uric acid excretion from, a mammalian subject, comprising administering to the subject a Compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof in an amount effective to reduce the uric acid concentration in blood of, or increase uric acid excretion from, the subject.
  • This invention provides the use of a biologically active agent in the manufacture of a medicament for reducing the uric acid concentration in blood of, or increasing uric acid excretion from, a mammal wherein the agent is a Compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and is formulated for administration in an amount effective to reduce the uric acid concentration in blood of, or increase uric acid excretion from, the subject.
  • This invention provides a pharmaceutical composition for use in reducing the uric acid concentration in blood of, or increasing uric acid excretion from, a mammalian subject comprising a Compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof in an amount effective to reduce the uric acid concentration in blood of, or increase uric acid excretion from, the subject.
  • This invention provides a kit comprising one or more unit oral doses of a Compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and instructions for administering the Compound of Formula I or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof to reduce the uric acid concentration in blood of, or increasing uric acid excretion from, a mammalian subject.
  • Reducing uric acid as described herein can be used to treat or prevent a variety of conditions including gout (any or all of: asymptomatic gout, acute gouty arthritis, intercritical gout, and chronic tophaceous gout), hyperuricemia, elevated levels of uric acid that do not meet the levels customarily justifying a diagnosis of hyperuricemia, renal dysfunction, kidney stones, cardiovascular disease, risk for developing cardiovascular disease and other consequences of hyperuricemia, cognitive impairment, and early-onset essential hypertension.
  • gout any or all of: asymptomatic gout, acute gouty arthritis, intercritical gout, and chronic tophaceous gout
  • hyperuricemia elevated levels of uric acid that do not meet the levels customarily justifying a diagnosis of hyperuricemia, renal dysfunction, kidney stones, cardiovascular disease, risk for developing cardiovascular disease and other consequences of hyperuricemia, cognitive impairment, and early-onset essential hypertension.
  • This invention is based on the observation that a compound of Formula I that was administered to humans reduced the level of uric acid in the blood of human patients and increased excretion of uric acid, as described in Examples 1 through 5.
  • the in vivo experiments utilized a compound in which R 6 is O. Because Compounds CF and CR are metabolites of Compound BI, it is believed that Compounds of Formula I in which R 6 is hydrogen or hydroxy will also reduce in vivo blood levels of uric acid and increase excretion of uric acid.
  • This invention is also based on the observation that compounds of Formula I, including compounds in which R 6 is O, hydrogen or hydroxy, inhibited URATl in vitro, as shown in Example 6. Inhibition of URATl is an established in vitro model for lowering uric acid in vivo.
  • This invention also provides the following compounds, their pharmaceutically acceptable salts, esters and prodrugs:
  • Figure 1 Compound BI increases excretion of uric acid in urine of mice treated with the uricase inhibitor potassium oxonate.
  • FIG. 1 Plasma UA (uric acid) levels over the initial 24-hour period in patients receiving various doses of Compound BI.
  • FIG. 3 Plasma UA (uric acid) levels over a 24-hour period on Day 7 of patients receiving various doses of Compound BI.
  • Figure 4 Compound EH Calibration curve, AGILENT LC-MS.
  • Figure 5 Compound EH concentration in rat plasma.
  • alkyl means a linear or branched-chain alkyl group.
  • An alkyl group identified as having a certain number of carbon atoms means any alkyl group having the specified number of carbons.
  • an alkyl having three carbon atoms can be propyl or isopropyl; and alkyl having four carbon atoms can be n-butyl, 1- methylpropyl, 2-methylpropyl or t-butyl.
  • halo refers to one or more of fluoro, chloro, and bromo.
  • perfluoro as in perfluoromethyl or perfluoromethoxy, means that the group in question has fluorine atoms in place of all of the hydrogen atoms.
  • R 6 The bond between R 6 and the carbon atom to which it is directly bonded is depicted in Formula I above by a solid line together with a dashed line. This depiction reflects that the bond in question can be either a single bond, when R 6 is hydrogen , methyl, ethyl or hydroxy, or a double bond, when R 6 is O.
  • the asterisk in the depiction of Formula I above indicates a possible chiral center, and that carbon is chiral when R 6 and R 12 are different, i.e., when R 6 is hydroxy, methyl or ethyl and R 12 is hydrogen or when R 6 is hydrogen, hydroxy or ethyl and R 12 is methyl.
  • this invention provides the racemate, the (R) enantiomer, and the (S) enantiomer, of the Compounds of Formula I, all of which are believed to be active.
  • a racemate is indicated by a wavy bond. Mixtures of these enantiomers can be separated by using HPLC, for example as described in Chirality 11 :420-425 (1999).
  • prodrug(s) of a compound of interest refers to other compounds that are cleaved, typically in vivo, to yield the compound of interest.
  • the transitional term "comprising" is open-ended. A claim utilizing this term can contain elements in addition to those recited in such claim. As used in the claims the word “or” means “and/or” unless such reading does not make sense in context. So for example the phrase “reducing the uric acid concentration in blood of or increasing uric acid excretion from, a mammalian subject” is equivalent to “reducing the uric acid concentration in blood of and/or increasing uric acid excretion from, a mammalian subject.
  • A is substituted (as defined above) or unsubstituted phenyl, for example 2,6-dimethylphenyl.
  • r is 1, t is 0, and q is 0.
  • R 10 is methoxy.
  • the two bulky substituents (i.e. other than R 10 ) around the central phenyl ring can be located in the ortho, meta or para position with respect to one another. Preferably they are in the meta position with respect to one another.
  • A is substituted (as defined above) or unsubstituted phenyl, t is 0, q is 0, r is 1, R 10 is hydrogen, n is 0, m is 0, 2 or 4. In a more specific embodiment A is 2,6-dimethylphenyl.
  • the Compound is represented by Formula IA.
  • the Compound is represented by Formula IAl .
  • the variables are as defined above.
  • two of R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 and R 5 are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, hydroxy, methyl, ethyl, perfluoromethyl, methoxy, ethoxy and perfluoromethoxy, the remainder are hydrogen; and the other variables are as defined above.
  • A is 2,6- dimethylphenyl, i.e. R 1 is methyl and R 5 is methyl.
  • Nonlimiting examples of compounds of Formula I include Compounds AF, AG, AH, AT, BM, BT, DO and EA.
  • Nonlimiting examples of compounds of Formula IA include Compounds BH, DP and EG.
  • Nonlimiting examples of compounds of Formula IAl include Compounds BI, CF, CR, DQ, AN, AW, BJ, BP, BS, EB, CD, CQ, CK, CM, DR, DS, DT, DU, DN, DV, DW, DX, DY and DZ, EB, EC, ED, EF, EH and EI.
  • R 10 is hydrogen, m is 0, 2 or 4; and n is 0.
  • R 1 is methyl and R 5 is methyl.
  • the compounds of Formula I can be made in accordance with the reaction schemes below.
  • many of the compounds of Formula I can be made according to methods described in WO 02/100341, WO 04/073611, WO 04/091486, WO 04/098496, WO 07/087506, WO 07/146768, and PCT/US2009/030845, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • R 10 is hydrogen, halo, alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms
  • R 6 is hydrogen or methyl
  • R 12 is hydrogen or methyl or R 6 and R 12 together are -CH 2 CH 2 -.
  • R 8 and R 9 is alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and the other is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and X is C(O), r is 0 and t is 0; X is NH(R 11 ) wherein R 11 is hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • R 7 is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, i.e. compounds of formula:
  • r R> 13 is alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms.
  • R 17 is alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms or benzyl group.
  • R 14 is chloro or bromo and Y is a halide.
  • the compound of formula II can be alkylated with the compound of formula III or with the compound of formula (IV) via reaction of step (a).
  • the reaction is carried out in a suitable solvent, such as tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydrofuran/ l,3-dimethyl-3,4,5,6- tetrahydro-2 (lH)-pyrimidinone, toluene, N,N-dimethylformamide, tetrahydrofuran/ hexamethylphosphoramide and the like.
  • the reaction is carried out in the presence of 2 to 3 molar equivalents of base to produce the compound of formula V where R 6 is alkyl having 1 to 2 carbon atoms and R 12 is hydrogen or 4 to 6 molar equivalents of base to produce the compounds of formula V where R 6 and R 12 are alkyl having 1 to 2 carbon atoms or together are -CH 2 CH 2 -.
  • the conventional base for this purpose can be sodium hydride, potassium hydride, sodium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, potassium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide, lithium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide, lithium diisopropylamide and the like. In carrying out this reaction it is generally preferred to utilize aq.
  • the reaction can be carried out at temperatures from -78 0 C to 25 0 C for 6 to 72 hours.
  • the conventional techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography and recrystallization can be utilized to purify the product.
  • R 6 and R 12 are hydrogens
  • the compound of Formula II can be converted to the compound of Formula VI by hydrolysis of nitriles to acid without the alkylation step A.
  • the compound of formula V can be converted to the compound of formula VI via reaction step (b) by acid or base hydrolysis.
  • acid or base hydrolysis In carrying out this reaction it is generally preferred to utilize basic hydrolysis, for example aqueous sodium hydroxide. Any of the conditions conventionally used in hydrolysis of nitrile to produce carboxylic acid can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (b).
  • the compound of formula VI can be converted to the compound of formula VII by esterification of compound of formula VI with methanol, ethanol or propanol.
  • the reaction can be carried out either by using catalyst for example H 2 SO 4 , TsOH and the like or by using dehydrating agent for example dicyclohexylcarbodiimide and the like. Any of the conditions conventional in such esterification reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (c).
  • the compound of formula VI can be reacted with the benzyl bromide in the presence of base for example, triethylamine, potassium carbonate to produce the compound of formula VII.
  • base for example, triethylamine, potassium carbonate
  • Any conditions conventional in such reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (c).
  • the compound of formula VII can be converted to the compound of formula XI first by de-alkoxylation by utilizing lewis acid for example BBr 3 or BCl 3 in dichloromethane or chloroform at low temperature for example -78 0 C. Any of the conditions conventional in such reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction via the reaction of step (d).
  • the product of reaction step (d) can be converted to the compound of formula XI via reaction of step (e) using Mitsunobu condensation with IX utilizing triphenylphosphine and diethyl azodicarboxylate or diisopropyl azodicarboxylate.
  • the reaction is carried out in a suitable solvent for example tetrahydrofuran. Any of the conditions conventionally used in Mitsunobu reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (e).
  • the compound of formula VII can be reacted with the compound of formula IX in the presence of dehydrating agent for example dicyclohexylcarbodiimide. Any conditions conventional in such reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (e).
  • the compound of formula XI can also be prepared by etherifying or alkylating the hydroxyl from step (d) with the compound of formula X via reaction of step (e).
  • Y include but are not limited to mesyloxy, tosyloxy, chloro, bromo, iodo, and the like. Any conventional method of etherifying of a hydroxyl group by reaction with a leaving group can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (e).
  • the compound of formula VII can be reacted with the compound of formula X where Y is chloro.
  • the reaction is carried out in the presence of base for example pyridine. Any conditions conventional in such reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (e).
  • the compound of formula XI is the compound of formula I where m is 0, n is 0 and R 7 is alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the compound of formula XI can be converted to the compound of formula XII via reaction of step (f) where m is 0, n is 0 and R 7 is H by ester hydrolysis. Any conventional method of ester hydrolysis will produce the compound of formula I where R 7 is H.
  • the benzyl group can be removed by catalytic hydrogenation to give the compound of formula I where R 7 is H. Any conditions conventional for catalytic hydrogenation reactions can be utilized to produce the compound of formula I.
  • IfA is phenyl substituted by 1 or 2 hydroxyl groups, it is generally preferred to protect the hydroxyl groups.
  • the suitable protecting group can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
  • the protecting group can be deprotected utilizing suitable deprotecting reagents such as those described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
  • R 10 is hydrogen, halo, alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms
  • R 6 is hydrogen or methyl
  • R 12 is hydrogen or methyl or R 6 and R 12 together are -CH 2 CH 2 -.
  • R 8 and R 9 is alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and the other is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and X is C(O), r is 0 and t is 0; X is NH(R 11 ) wherein R 11 is hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • R 7 is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, i.e. compounds of formula:
  • A wherein A is described as above, can be prepared via reaction scheme of Scheme 2.
  • A, q, t, m, r, R 6 , R 7 , R 10 and R 12 are as above, and Y is a halide.
  • R 17 is alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms or benzyl group.
  • the compound of formula VII can be reduced to the compound of formula XIII via reaction of step (g).
  • the reaction is carried out utilizing a conventional reducing agent for example alkali metal hydride such as lithium aluminum hydride.
  • the reaction is carried out in a suitable solvent, such as tetrahydrofuran. Any of the conditions conventional in such reduction reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (g).
  • the compound of formula XIII can be converted to the compound of formula XIV by displacing hydroxyl group with a halogen group preferred halogen being bromo or chloro.
  • a halogen group preferred halogen being bromo or chloro.
  • Appropriate halogenating reagents include but are not limited to thionyl chloride, bromine, phosphorous tribromide, carbon tetrabromide and the like. Any conditions conventional in such halogenation reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (h).
  • the compound of formula XIV can be converted to the compound of formula XV by reacting Y with an alkali metal cyanide for example sodium, potassium or copper cyanide.
  • the reaction is carried out in a suitable solvent, such as ethanol, dimethyl sulfoxide and the like. Any of the conditions conventionally used in the preparation of nitriles can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (i).
  • the compound of formula XV can be converted to the compound of formula XVI via reaction step (j) by acid or base hydrolysis.
  • acid or base hydrolysis In carrying out this reaction it is generally preferred to utilize basic hydrolysis, for example aqueous sodium hydroxide in ethanol, tetrahydrofuran: water and the like. Any of the conditions conventionally used in hydrolysis of nitrile can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (j).
  • the compound of formula XVI can be converted to the compound of formula XVII via reaction of step (k) in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (c).
  • the compound of formula XVII can be converted to the compound of formula XVIII via reaction of step (1) in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (d) and reaction of step (e).
  • the compound of formula XVIII is the compound of formula I where m is 1 , n is 0 and R 7 is alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the compound of formula XVIII can be converted to the compound of formula I where m is 1 , n is 0 and R 7 is H in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (f).
  • the compound of formula XIV can be reacted with diethyl malonate utilizing a suitable base for example sodium hydride to give the compound of formula XIX.
  • a suitable base for example sodium hydride
  • the reaction is carried out in suitable solvent, such as N,N-dimethylformamide, tetrahydrofuran and the like. Any of the conditions conventional in such alkylation reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (m).
  • the compound of formula XIX can be hydrolyzed and decarboxylated utilizing sodium hydroxide in suitable solvent, such as ethanol-water to give the compound of formula XX. Any of the conditions conventional in such reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (n).
  • the compound of formula XX can be converted to the compound of formula XXI via reaction of step (o) in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (c).
  • the compound of formula XXI can be converted to the compound of formula XXII via reaction of step (p) in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (d) and reaction of step (e).
  • the compound of formula XXII is the compound of formula I where m is 2, n is 0 and R 7 is alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the compound of formula XXII can be converted to the compound of formula I where m is 2, n is 0 and R 7 is H in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (f).
  • the compound of formula XX can be reduced to give the compound of formula XXIII via reaction of step (q). This reaction can be carried out in the same manner as described hereinbefore in the reaction of step (g).
  • the compound of formula XXIII can be converted to the compound of formula XXIV via reaction of step (r) in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (h).
  • the compound of formula XXIV can be converted to the compound of formula XXV via reaction of step (s) in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (i).
  • the compound of formula XXV can be converted to the compound of formula XXVI via reaction of step (t) in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (j).
  • the compound of formula XXVI can be converted to the compound of formula XXVII via reaction of step (u) in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (c).
  • the compound of formula XXVII can be converted to the compound of formula XXVIII via reaction of step (v) in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (d) and reaction of step (e).
  • the compound of formula XXVIII is the compound of formula I where m is 3, n is 0 and R 7 is alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the compound of formula XXVIII can be converted to the compound of formula I where m is 3, n is 0 and R 7 is H in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (f).
  • the compound of formula XXIV can be converted to the compound of formula XXIX via reaction of step (w) in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (m).
  • the compound of formula XXIX can be converted to the compound of formula XXX via reaction of step (x) in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (n).
  • the compound of formula XXX can be converted to the compound of formula XXXI via reaction of step (y) in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (c).
  • the compound of formula XXXI can be converted to the compound of formula XXXII via reaction of step (z) in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (d) and reaction of step (e).
  • the compound of formula XXXII is the compound of formula I where m is 4, n is 0 and R 7 is alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the compound of formula XXXII can be converted to the compound of formula I where m is 4, n is 0 and R 7 is H in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (f).
  • the products in all the steps can be isolated and purified by techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography, and recrystallization.
  • IfA is phenyl substituted by 1 or 2 hydroxyl groups, it is generally preferred to protect the hydroxyl groups.
  • the suitable protecting group can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
  • the protecting group can be deprotected utilizing suitable deprotecting reagents such as those described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
  • R 8 and R 9 is alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and the other is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and X is C(O), r is O and t is 0; X is NH(R 11 ) wherein R 11 is hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • R 7 is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, i.e. compounds of formula:
  • the compound of formula XXXIII can be converted to the compound of formula XXXV via reaction of step (a') using Wittig reaction by treating the compound of formula XXXIII with the compound of formula XXXIV.
  • Any conventional method of reacting an aldehyde with a triarylphosphine hydrohalide can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (a').
  • Any of the conditions conventional in Wittig reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (a').
  • the compound of formula XXXV can be converted to the compound of formula XXXVI by reduction of alkene via catalytic hydrogenation in the presence of transition metal catalyst for example, raney nickel, palladium-on-charcoal, platinum metal or its oxide under hydrogen atmosphere. Any of the conditions conventional in such catalytic hydrogenation can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (b').
  • transition metal catalyst for example, raney nickel, palladium-on-charcoal, platinum metal or its oxide under hydrogen atmosphere. Any of the conditions conventional in such catalytic hydrogenation can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (b').
  • the compound of formula XXXVI can be alkylated with the compound of formula III to produce the compound of formula XXXVII via reaction of step (c').
  • the reaction is carried out in a suitable solvent, such as tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydrofuran/ 1,3-dimethyl- 3,4,5, 6-tetrahydro-2 (lH)-pyrimidinone, terahydrofuran/hexamethylphosphoramide and the like.
  • a suitable solvent such as tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydrofuran/ 1,3-dimethyl- 3,4,5, 6-tetrahydro-2 (lH)-pyrimidinone, terahydrofuran/hexamethylphosphoramide and the like.
  • the reaction is carried out in the presence of 2 to 3 molar equivalents of base to produce the compound of formula XXXVII where one of R 8 and R 9 is alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms other is hydrogen or 4 to 6 molar equivalents of base to produce the compound of formula XXXVII where R 8 and R 9 are alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the conventional base can be potassium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide, lithium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide, lithium diisopropylamide and the like. Generally, the reaction is carried out at temperatures from -78 0 C to 25 0 C for 6 to 72 hours.
  • the conventional techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography and recrystallization can be utilized to purify the product.
  • n 1
  • the compound of formula XXXVII can be converted to the compound of formula XXXVIII by de-alkoxylation by utilizing lewis acid for example BBr 3 or BCl 3 in dichloromethane or chloroform at low temperature for example -78 0 C. Any of the conditions conventional in such reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (d').
  • the compound of formula XXXVIII can be converted to the compound of formula XXXIX via reaction of step (e') in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of steps (e).
  • the compound of formula XXXIX is the compound of formula I where m is 0 to 3, n is 1 and R 7 is an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the compound of formula XXXIX can be converted to the compound of formula XL via reaction of step (f ) in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of steps (f).
  • the compound of XL is the compound of formula I where m is 0 to 3, n is 1 and R 7 is H.
  • the conventional techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography and recrystallization can be utilized to purify the products.
  • IfA is phenyl substituted by 1 or 2 hydroxyl groups, it is generally preferred to protect the hydroxyl groups.
  • the suitable protecting group can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
  • the protecting group can be deprotected after the reaction of step (e') utilizing suitable deprotecting reagents such as those described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene. Reaction Scheme ' .
  • R 10 is hydrogen, halo, alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms
  • R 6 is O and R 12 is absent
  • R 7 is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms
  • one of R 8 and R 9 is alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms
  • the other is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms
  • X is C(O), r is 0 and t is 0
  • X is NH(R 11 ) wherein R 11 is hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, i.e. compounds of formula:
  • A is described as above, can be prepared via reaction scheme of Scheme 4.
  • A, q, t, r, R 7 and R 10 are as above.
  • Y is a leaving group.
  • the compound of formula XLI can be converted to the compound of formula XLII via reaction of step (g') using Mitsunobu condensation of XLI with IX using triphenylphosphine and diethyl azodicarboxylate or diisopropyl azodicarboxylate.
  • the reaction is carried out in a suitable solvent for example tetrahydrofuran. Any of the conditions conventionally used in Mitsunobu reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (g').
  • the compound of formula XLII can also be prepared by etherifying or alkylating the compound of formula XLI with the compound of formula X via the reaction of step (h') by using suitable base such as potassium carbonate, sodium hydride, triethylamine, pyridine and the like.
  • suitable base such as potassium carbonate, sodium hydride, triethylamine, pyridine and the like.
  • Y include but are not limited to mesyloxy, tosyloxy, chloro, bromo, iodo, and the like. Any conventional conditions to alkylate a hydroxyl group with a leaving group can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (h').
  • the reaction of step (h') is preferred over step (g') if compound of formula X is readily available.
  • the compound of formula XLII can be converted to the compound of formula XLIV via reaction of step (i') by oxidation of methyl group with selenium dioxide (XLII) in the presence of pyridine. Generally the reaction is carried out at temperatures of from 25 0 C-IOO 0 C. The product can be isolated and purified by techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography, and recrystallization.
  • the compound of formula XLIV is the compound of formula I where m is 0, n is 0, R 6 is O, R 12 is absent and R 7 is H.
  • the compound of formula XLIV can be converted to the compound of formula XLV by esterif ⁇ cation of compound of formula XLIV with methanol, ethanol or propanol.
  • the reaction can be carried out either by using catalyst for example H 2 SO 4 , TsOH and the like or by using dehydrating agent for example dicyclohexylcarbodiimide and the like. Any of the conditions conventional in such esterif ⁇ cation reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (j').
  • the compound of formula XLV is the compound of formula I where m is 0, n is 0 and R 7 is an alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the product can be isolated and purified by techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography, and recrystallization. IfA is phenyl substituted by 1 or 2 hydroxyl groups, it is generally preferred to protect the hydroxyl groups.
  • the suitable protecting group can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
  • the protecting group can be deprotected utilizing suitable deprotecting reagents such as those described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
  • R , 10 is hydrogen, halo, alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, R is O and R , 12 is absent, R is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and one of R 8 and R 9 is alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and the other is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and X is C(O), r is 0 and t is 0; X is NH(R 11 ) wherein R 11 is hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, i.e. compounds of formula:
  • reaction scheme of Scheme 5 wherein A is described as above, can be prepared via reaction scheme of Scheme 5.
  • A, q, t, r, R 7 and R 10 are as above.
  • Y is a leaving group.
  • the compound of formula XLII (prepared in the same manner as described in the reaction of scheme 4) can be reacted with dialkyl carbonate via reaction of step (k') in the presence of a suitable base such as sodium hydride and the like.
  • the reaction can be carried out in conventional solvents such as N, N'-dimethylformamide, tetrahydrofuran, dichloromethane and the like followed by addition of dialkyl carbonate such as dimethyl or diethyl or dipropyl carbonate to produce the corresponding compound of formula XLVI. Any conditions conventional in such alkylation reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (k').
  • the compound of formula XLVI is the compound of formula I where m is 1, n is 0, R 6 is O, R 12 is absent and R 7 is alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the compound of formula XLVI can be converted to the compound of formula XLVII via reaction step (1') in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (f).
  • the compound of XLVII is the compound of formula I where m is 1, n is 0 and R 7 is H.
  • the conventional techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography and recrystallization can be utilized to purify the products.
  • IfA is phenyl substituted by 1 or 2 hydroxyl groups, it is generally preferred to protect the hydroxyl groups.
  • the suitable protecting group can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
  • the protecting group can be deprotected utilizing suitable deprotecting reagents such as those described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene. Reaction Scheme 5
  • R , 10 is hydrogen, halo, alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, R is O and R , 12 is absent, R is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and one of R 8 and R 9 is alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and the other is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and X is C(O), r is 0 and t is 0; X is NH(R 11 ) wherein R 11 is hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, i.e. compounds of formula:
  • R 16 is alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms or benzyl group and p is 1 to 3.
  • the compound of formula XLII (prepared in the same manner as described in the reaction of scheme 4) can be converted to the compound of formula XLIX via the reaction of step (m') by alkylating the compound of formula XLII with the compound of formula XLVIII. This reaction can be carried out in the presence of approximately a molar equivalent of a conventional base that converts acetophenone to 3-keto ester (i.e. gamma-keto ester).
  • alkali metal salts of hexamethyldisilane such as lithium bis-(trimethylsilyl) amide and the like.
  • this reaction is carried out in inert solvents such as tetrahydrofuran: l,3-Dimethyl-3,4,5,6- tetrahydro-2 (lH)-pyrimidinone.
  • the reaction is carried out at temperatures of from -65 0 C to 25 0 C. Any of the conditions conventional in such alkylation reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (m').
  • the compound of formula XLIX can be converted to the compound of formula L via reaction of step (n') where X is NH(R 11 ) wherein R 11 is hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms and R 7 is H by ester hydrolysis or compound of formula L where X is C(O) and r is 0 and t is 0 and R 7 is H by catalytic hydrogenation. Any conventional methods of ester hydrolysis and catalytic hydrogenation to remove benzyl group can be utilized to produce the compound of formula L.
  • the compound of formula L is the compound of formula I where m is 2 to 4, n is 0, R 6 is O, R 12 is absent and R 7 is H.
  • the compound of formula L can be converted to the compound of formula LI via reaction of step (o') where R 7 is alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms in the same manner as described in the reaction of step (c).
  • the compound of formula LI is the compound of formula I where m is 2 to 4, n is 0 and R 7 is alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the conventional techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography and recrystallization can be utilized to purify the products.
  • IfA is phenyl substituted by 1 or 2 hydroxyl groups, it is generally preferred to protect the hydroxyl groups.
  • the suitable protecting group can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
  • the protecting group can be deprotected utilizing suitable deprotecting reagents such as those described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
  • R 16 is alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms or benzyl group.
  • R 13 is alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and Y is a halide.
  • the compound of formula LII can be converted to the compound of formula LIII in the same manner as described hereinbefore in the reaction of (c').
  • the compound of LIII is the compound of formula I where m is 0 to 3, n is 1 and R 7 is alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the compound of formula LIII can be converted to the compound of formula LIV via reaction of step (q') where X is NH(R 11 ) wherein R 11 is hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms and R 7 is H by ester hydrolysis or compound of formula LIV where X is C(O) and r is 0 and t is 0 and R 7 is H by catalytic hydrogenation. Any conventional methods of ester hydrolysis and catalytic hydrogenation can be utilized to produce the compound of formula LIV.
  • the compound of formula LIV is the compound of formula I where m is 0 to 3, n is 1, R 6 is O, R 12 is absent and R 7 is H.
  • the conventional techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography and recrystallization can be utilized to purify the products.
  • A is phenyl substituted by 1 or 2 hydroxyl groups, it is generally preferred to protect the hydroxyl groups.
  • the suitable protecting group can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
  • the protecting group can be deprotected utilizing suitable deprotecting reagents such as those described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
  • R 10 is hydrogen, halo, alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms
  • R 6 is hydroxy and R 12 is hydrogen
  • R 7 is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms
  • one of R 8 and R 9 is alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms
  • the other is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms
  • X is C(O), r is 0 and t is 0
  • X is NH(R 11 ) wherein R 11 is hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, i.e. compounds of formula:
  • the compound of formula XLV (prepared in the same manner as described in the reaction of scheme 4) can be converted to the compound of formula LV via reaction of step (r') by hydrogenation of alpha-keto acid using catalyst for example rhodium- ⁇ amidophosphine- phosphinite ⁇ (Tetrahedron: Asymmetry, VoI 8, No. 7, 1083-1099, 1997),
  • the compound of formula LVI is the compound of formula I where m is 0, n is 0 and R 7 is H.
  • the product can be isolated and purified by techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography, and recrystallization.
  • IfA is phenyl substituted by 1 or 2 hydroxyl groups, it is generally preferred to protect the hydroxyl groups.
  • the suitable protecting group can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
  • the protecting group can be deprotected utilizing suitable deprotecting reagents such as those described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene. Reaction Scheme 8
  • R 10 is hydrogen, halo, alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms
  • R 6 is hydroxy and R 12 is hydrogen
  • R 7 is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms
  • one of R 8 and R 9 is alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms
  • the other is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms
  • X is C(O), r is 0 and t is 0
  • X is NH(R 11 ) wherein R 11 is hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, i.e. compounds of formula:
  • the compound of formula XLVI (prepared in the same manner as described in the reaction of scheme 5) can be converted the compound of formula LVII via reaction of step (f) by reducing the beta -keto group to an alcohol group.
  • the reaction can be carried out by utilizing a conventional reducing agent that converts ketone to an alcohol for example, the reaction can be carried out by hydrogenation using a Raney nickel catalyst that had been treated with tartaric acid (Harada, T.; Izumi, Y. Chem Lett.
  • the compound of formula LVII is the compound of formula I where m is 1, n is 0, R 6 is hydroxyl, R 12 is hydrogen and R 7 is alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the compound of formula LVII can be converted to compound of formula LVIII via reaction of step (u') where R 7 is H in the same manner as described in the reaction of step (f).
  • the compound of formula LVIII is the compound of formula I where m is 1 , n is 0 and R 7 is H.
  • the product can be isolated and purified by techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography, and recrystallization.
  • IfA is phenyl substituted by 1 or 2 hydroxyl groups, it is generally preferred to protect the hydroxyl groups.
  • the suitable protecting group can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
  • the protecting group can be deprotected utilizing suitable deprotecting reagents such as those described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
  • R 10 is hydrogen, halo, alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms
  • R 6 is hydroxy and R 12 is hydrogen
  • R 7 is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms
  • one of R 8 and R 9 is alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms
  • the other is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms
  • X is C(O), r is 0 and t is 0;
  • X is NH(R 11 ) wherein R 11 is hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, i.e. compounds of formula:
  • A is described as above, can be prepared via reaction scheme of Scheme 10.
  • A, t, r, q, R 7 , and R 10 are as above.
  • R 16 is alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms or benzyl group and p is 1 to 3.
  • the compound of formula XLIX (prepared in the same manner as described in the reaction of scheme 6) can be converted to the compound of formula LIX via reaction of step (v') by reducing the ketone group to an alcohol group.
  • the reaction can be carried out by utilizing a conventional reducing agent that converts ketone to alcohol. In carrying out this reaction it is generally preferred but not limited to utilize sodium borohydride as the reducing agent. Generally this reaction is carried out in solvents such as methanol, ethanol and the like. Generally the reaction is carried out at temperatures of from O 0 C to 25 0 C.
  • the product can be isolated and purified by techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography, and recrystallization.
  • Racemic mixtures of formula LIX can be separated by using HPLC. (Chirality 11 :420- 425 (1999).
  • the compound of formula LIX is the compound of formula I where m is 2 to 4, n is 0, R 6 is hydroxy, R 12 is hydrogen and R 7 is an alkyl group having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • the compound of formula LIX can be converted to the compound of formula LX where R 7 is H by ester hydrolysis or catalytic hydrogenation via reaction of step (w') in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (f). Any conventional methods of ester hydrolysis or catalytic hydrogenation will produce the compound of formula I where R 1 is H.
  • the product can be isolated and purified by techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography, and recrystallization. IfA is phenyl substituted by 1 or 2 hydroxyl groups, it is generally preferred to protect the hydroxyl groups.
  • the suitable protecting group can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
  • the protecting group can be deprotected utilizing suitable deprotecting reagents such as those described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
  • the compound of formula LXI can be converted to the compound of formula LXII where R 7 is H via reaction of step (y') in the same manner as described hereinbefore in the reaction of step (f ).
  • the compound of formula LXII is the compound of formula I where m is 0 to 3, n is 1, R 6 is hydroxyl, R 12 is H and R 7 is H.
  • the product can be isolated and purified by techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography, and recrystallization. IfA is phenyl substituted by 1 or 2 hydroxyl groups, it is generally preferred to protect the hydroxyl groups.
  • the suitable protecting group can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
  • the protecting group can be deprotected utilizing suitable deprotecting reagents such as those described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
  • the compound of formula LXIII can be reduced to the compound of formula LXIV via reaction of step (z').
  • the reaction is carried out utilizing a conventional reducing agent for example alkali metal hydride such as lithium aluminum hydride.
  • the reaction is carried out in a suitable solvent, such as tetrahydrofuran. Any of the conditions conventional in such reduction reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (z').
  • the compound of formula LXIV is the compound of formula IX where t is 0 and r is 1.
  • the compound of formula LXIV can be converted to the compound of formula LXV by displacing hydroxyl group with a halogen group preferred halogen being bromo or chloro.
  • a halogen group preferred halogen being bromo or chloro.
  • Appropriate halogenating reagents include but are not limited to thionyl chloride, bromine, phosphorous tribromide, carbon tetrabromide and the like. Any conditions conventional in such halogenation reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (a").
  • the compound of formula LXV is the compound of formula X where t is 0 and r is 1.
  • the compound of formula LXV can be converted to the compound of formula LXVI by reacting LXV with an alkali metal cyanide for example sodium or potassium cyanide.
  • the reaction is carried out in a suitable solvent, such as ethanol, dimethyl sulfoxide. Any of the conditions conventionally used in the preparation of nitrile can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (b").
  • the compound of formula LXVI can be converted to the compound of formula LXVII via reaction step (c") by acid or base hydrolysis.
  • acid or base hydrolysis In carrying out this reaction it is generally preferred to utilize basic hydrolysis, for example aqueous sodium hydroxide. Any of the conditions conventionally used in hydrolysis of nitrile can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (c").
  • the compound of formula LXVII can be reduced to give the compound of formula LXVIII via reaction of step (d"). This reaction can be carried out in the same manner as described hereinbefore in the reaction of step (z').
  • the compound of formula LXVIII is the compound of formula IX where t is 1 and r is 1.
  • the compound of formula LXVIII can be converted to the compound of formula LXIX via reaction of step (e") in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (a").
  • the compound of formula LXIX is the compound of formula X where t is 1 and r is 1.
  • the compound of formula LXIX can be converted to the compound of formula LXX via reaction of step (f ') in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (b").
  • the compound of formula LXX can be hydrolyzed by acid or base to give the compound of formula LXXI via reaction of step (g").
  • the compound of formula LXXI can be converted to the compound of formula LXXII via reaction of step (h' ') in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (z').
  • the compound of formula LXXII is the compound of formula IX where t is 1 and r is 2.
  • the compound of formula LXXII can be converted to the compound of formula LXXIII via reaction of step (i' ') in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (a").
  • the compound of formula LXXIII is the compound of formula X where t is 1 and r is 2.
  • the product can be isolated and purified by techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography, and recrystallization. IfA is phenyl substituted by 1 or 2 hydroxyl groups, it is generally preferred to protect the hydroxyl groups.
  • the suitable protecting group can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
  • A, t, r, and R 11 are as above.
  • Y is chloro or bromo.
  • the compound of formula LXXIV can be mesylated to furnish the compound of formula LXXV via the reaction of step (j "). Any conventional conditions to carry out the mesylation reaction of a hydroxyl group can be utilized to carry out the step (j").
  • the compound of formula LXXV is then heated with the compound of formula LXXVI to produce the compound of formula LXXVII. Any of the conditions conventional to produce amino alcohols can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (k' ').
  • the compound of formula LXXVII is the compound of formula IX.
  • alcohol in the compound of formula LXXVII, alcohol can be displaced by chloro or bromo by treating the compound of formula LXXVII with thionyl chloride, bromine, phosphorus tribromide, oxalyl chloride, carbon tetrabromide and the like to produce the compound of formula LXXVIII. Any conventional method to displace alcohol with chloro or bromo can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (1").
  • the compound of formula LXXVIII is the compound of formula X.
  • IfA is phenyl substituted by 1 or 2 hydroxyl groups, it is generally preferred to protect the hydroxyl groups.
  • the suitable protecting group can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
  • the protecting group can be deprotected utilizing suitable deprotecting reagents such as those described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene. Reaction Scheme 13
  • R 10 is as above.
  • Y is a halide.
  • the compound of formula LXXIX can be converted to the compound of formula LXXX via reaction of step (m") by alkylation of carboxylic acid and alcohol in the presence of base for example potassium carbonate by using methyl iodide in aprotic solvent for example N, N- dimethylformamide. Any conventional conditions of such alkylations can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (m").
  • the compound of formula LXXX can be reduced to give the compound of formula LXXXI via reaction of step (n").
  • the reaction is carried out utilizing a conventional reducing agent for example alkali metal hydride such as lithium aluminum hydride.
  • the reaction is carried out in a suitable solvent, such as tetrahydrofuran and the like. Any of the conditions conventional in such reduction reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (n").
  • the compound of formula LXXXI can be converted to the compound of formula LXXXII by displacing hydroxyl group with a halogen group preferred halogen being bromo or chloro.
  • halogenating reagents include but are not limited to thionyl chloride, bromine, phosphorous tribromide, carbon tetrabromide and the like. Any conditions conventional in such halogenation reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (o").
  • the compound of formula LXXXII can be converted to the compound of formula II by reacting LXXXII with alkali metal cyanide for example sodium, potassium, and copper cyanide.
  • alkali metal cyanide for example sodium, potassium, and copper cyanide.
  • the reaction is carried out in a suitable solvent, such as ethanol, dimethyl sulfoxide. Any of the conditions conventionally used in the preparation of nitriles can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (p").
  • R 10 is as above.
  • the compound of formula LXXXI can be converted to the compound of formula XXXIII via reaction of step (q' ') by oxidation of alcohol to the aldehyde.
  • the reaction can be carried out utilizing a suitable oxidizing agent for example pyridinium chlorochromate, or dimethyl sulfoxide activated by 2,4,6-trichloro[l,3,5]-triazine (cyanuric chloride, TCT) under Swern oxidation conditions (J.O.C. 2001, 66, 7907-7909) and the like. Any of the conditions conventional in such oxidation reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (q").
  • R 15 and p are as above.
  • the compound of formula LXXXIII can be reacted with the compound of formula LXXXIV via the reaction of step (r") to give compound of formula XXXIV.
  • Any of the conditions conventionally used in reacting triphenylphosphine with hydrohalide can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (r").
  • R 10 is as above.
  • the compound of formula XLI can be synthesized according to the method of George M Rubottom et al., J. Org. Chem. 1983, 48, 1550-1552.
  • R 15 is alkyl group having from 1 to 2 carbon atoms.
  • P is a hydroxyl protecting group.
  • the compound of formula LXXXV can be converted to the compound of formula LXXXVI via reaction of step (t") by protecting phenol group by suitable protecting group.
  • the suitable conditions for the protecting group can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
  • the compound of formula LXXXVI can be converted to the compound of formula LXXXVII by oxidation of aldehyde to carboxylic acid.
  • the reaction can be carried out by using suitable oxidizing reagents for example, pyridinium chlorochromate, potassium permanganate, sodium permanganate and the like. Any of the conditions suitable in such oxidation reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (u").
  • the compound of formula LXXXVII can be converted to the compound of formula LXXIX via reaction of step (v' ') where R 10 is alkoxy having 1 carbon atom by deprotection of protecting group.
  • R 10 is alkoxy having 1 carbon atom by deprotection of protecting group.
  • the suitable deprotecting conditions can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T Greene.
  • the compound of formula LXXXVII can be converted to the compound of formula LXXXVIII by treating the compound of formula LXXXVII with boron tribromide or boron trichloride using solvent for example dichloromethane for 4 to 48 hours at the temperature from -72 0 C to O 0 C. Any of the conditions conventional in such reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (w' ').
  • the compound of formula LXXXVIII can be converted to the compound of formula LXXXIX by esterif ⁇ cation of compound of formula LXXXVIII with methanol or ethanol.
  • the reaction can be carried out either by using catalysts for example H 2 SO 4 , TsOH and the like or by using dehydrating agent for example dicyclohexylcarbodiimide and the like. Any of the conditions conventional in such esterif ⁇ cation reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (x").
  • the compound of formula LXXXIX can be converted to the compound of formula LXXXX by etherifying or alkylating the compound of formula LXXXIX with alkyl halide having 2 to 3 carbon atoms by using suitable base for example potassium carbonate, sodium hydride, pyridine and the like.
  • suitable base for example potassium carbonate, sodium hydride, pyridine and the like.
  • the reaction can be carried out in conventional solvents, such as terahydrofuran, N, N-dimethylformamide, dichloromethane and the like.
  • the reaction is generally carried out at temperatures from O 0 C to 4O 0 C. Any of the conditions suitable in such alkylation reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (y ").
  • the compound of formula LXXXX can be converted to the compound of formula LXXIX via reaction of step (z") where R 10 is alkoxy having 2 to 3 carbon atoms by deprotection of protecting group.
  • R 10 is alkoxy having 2 to 3 carbon atoms by deprotection of protecting group.
  • the suitable deprotecting conditions can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T Greene.
  • the product can be isolated and purified by techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography, and recrystallization.
  • Synthesis can be adapted from J.A.C.S (1974), 96(7), 2121-9 by using ethyl alpha formyl valerate.
  • 3-Propylphenol can be methylated to 3-Propylanisole, which was then formylated to 4- Methoxy-3-benzaldehyde.
  • the aldehyde can be oxidized by Jone's reagent to give corresponding acid and deprotection of methyl group by BBr 3 will give the title compound.
  • This invention provides a method for reducing uric acid levels in a mammalian subject or increasing uric acid excretion from a mammalian subject.
  • the level of uric acid in a mammal can be determined using any conventional measure. Typically the level of uric acid in the blood is determined. Uric acid can also be deposited or precipitated in tissues, resulting in depots (e.g. tophi) that can be affected by raising or lowering blood uric acid concentrations, and which conversely can contribute to circulating uric acid.
  • the method of this invention for reducing uric acid can be used to treat or prevent a variety of conditions including gout, hyperuricemia, elevated levels of uric acid that do not meet the levels customarily justifying a diagnosis of hyperuricemia, kidney stones, renal dysfunction, cardiovascular disease, cardiovascular risk factor, and cognitive impairment.
  • administration of the compounds of Formula I slows progression of kidney disease.
  • An elevated uric acid level has been identified as a risk factor for cardiovascular disease.
  • a significant correlation has been shown between elevated uric acid and cognitive impairment in older adults. (Schretlen, D.J. et al., "Serum Uric Acid and Cognitive Function in Community-Dwelling Older Adults", Neuropsychology (Jan.
  • the method of this invention for reducing uric acid can be used to treat or prevent cognitive impairment, including cognitive impairment in elderly adults. It is well known that people with Lesch-Nyhan Syndrome have elevated levels of uric acid and suffer the numerous consequences of this hyperuricemia, including gout. Thus, this invention for reducing blood levels and increasing elimination of uric acid can be used to treat people with Lesch-Nyhan Syndrome.
  • the normal range of uric acid in blood is between 3.4 mg/dL and 7.0 mg/dL in men, between 2.4 mg/dL and 6.0 mg/dL in premenopausal women, and from 2.5 mg/dL to 5.5 mg/dL in children.
  • Urate crystal formation/precipitation typically occurs in men at levels of 6.6 mg/dL or higher and in women at levels of 6.0 mg/dL or higher. This illustrates that levels of uric acid that are within the so-called normal range can have undesirable health consequences, even producing gout.
  • what may be in the normal range for the population as a whole may be elevated for the individual. Cardiovascular and other consequences of elevated uric acid can occur with blood levels well within these "normal" ranges. Therefore, a diagnosis of hyperuricemia is not necessarily a prerequisite for the beneficial effects of the compounds of the invention.
  • This invention includes the treatment of hyperuricemia associated with gout, hypertension, vascular inflammation, heart failure, arterio-venous disorders, myocardial infarct, stroke, pre-eclampsia, eclampsia, sleep apnea, renal dysfunction (including renal failure, end stage renal disease [ESRD]), organ transplant, diuretics, thiazides, cyclosporine, aspirin, vitamin C, nicotinic acid, levodopa (L-DOPA), cytotosic drugs, and certain antibacterial agents (such as pyrozinamide), cirrhosis, thyroid dysfunction, parathyroid dysfunction, lung cancer, anemia, leukemia, lymphoma, multiple myeloma, tumor-lysis syndrome, thyroid or parathyroid dysfunction, Lesch-Nyhan Syndrome, smoking, alcohol consumption, and psoriasis.
  • hyperuricemia associated with gout, hypertension, vascular inflammation, heart failure, arterio-venous disorders, myo
  • This invention includes the treatment of hyperuricemia that can lead to gout, formation of urate crystals, renal dysfunction, graft or organ failure following transplant, endothelial disorders (such as inflammation), chronic heart failure, arterio-venous disorders, pre-eclampsia, eclampsia, hypertension, and cognitive impairment.
  • tissue deposits of uric acid including but not limited to tophi, are reduced, and the incidence and severity of gout flares are also reduced.
  • the Compound of Formula I or salt thereof can be administered by any conventional route of systemic administration. Preferably they are administered orally. Accordingly, it is preferred for the medicament to be formulated for oral administration.
  • Other routes of administration that can be used in accordance with this invention include rectally, parenterally, by injection (e.g. intravenous, subcutaneous, intramuscular or intraperitioneal injection), or nasally.
  • each of the uses and methods of treatment of this invention comprise administering any of the embodiments of the Compound of Formula I or pharmaceutically salts thereof.
  • each such agent and group of agents is not being repeated, but they are incorporated into this description of uses and methods of treatment as if they were repeated.
  • Both human and non-human mammalian subjects can be treated in accordance with the treatment method of this invention.
  • the optimal dose of a particular active agent of the invention for a particular subject can be determined in the clinical setting by a skilled clinician.
  • the Compound of Formula I or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is generally administered to adults in a daily dose of from 1 mg to 2500 mg, more preferably from 1 mg to 1200 mg, more preferably from 400 mg to 1000 mg, more preferably from 600 mg to 800 mg, more preferably from 600 mg to 1000 mg, administered once or twice per day.
  • the average body weight of a typical adult is 60 to 70 kilograms, so that appropriate dose ranges expressed as mg/kg are approximately from 0.015 to 42 mg/kg, more preferably from 0.015 to 20 mg/kg, more preferably from 6.6 to 13 mg/kg, more preferably from 10 to 13 mg/kg mg, more preferably from 10 to 16 mg/kg, administered once or twice per day.
  • the optimal dose is determined by the patient's physician.
  • the Compound of Formula I or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is generally administered in a daily dose from 1 to 300 mg of the agent per kilogram of body weight.
  • the dosage ranges listed above should be decreased by a factor of about 10.
  • the Compound of Formula I or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be administered in combination with other uric acid lowering drugs.
  • the dose of the Compound of Formula I or its salts is as described above.
  • Any conventional or investigational uric acid lowering drug can be utilized in combination with the compounds of Formula I.
  • xanthine oxidase inhibitors such as allopurinol (from 100 mg/day to 1000 mg/day; more typically from 100 mg/day to 300 mg/day) febuxostat (from 40 mg/day to 120 mg/day; more specifically from 60 mg/day to 80 mg/day) and oxypurinol; Puricase / PEG-uricase (from 4 mg to 12 mg every two weeks by infusion); uricosuric agents such as sulfinpyrazone (from 100 mg/day to 800 mg/day), probenecid (500 mg/day), losartan (from 25 mg/day to 200 mg/day, more typically from 50 mg/day to 100 mg/day), fenofibrate, JTT-552 (a URAT-I inhibitor), benzbromarone (from 70mg/day to 150 mg/day), and statins such as atorvastatin (LIPITOR®).
  • the other uric acid lowering drug can be administered in its usual amount or in an amount that
  • the compounds of Formula I and their pharmaceutically acceptable salts can be administered together with other drugs used to decrease the pain associated with gouty attacks, for example nonsteroidal antiinflammatory drugs (NSAIDs), colchicine, corticosteroids, and other analgesics.
  • NSAIDs nonsteroidal antiinflammatory drugs
  • colchicine colchicine
  • corticosteroids corticosteroids
  • analgesics for example nonsteroidal antiinflammatory drugs (NSAIDs), colchicine, corticosteroids, and other analgesics.
  • citrate or bicarbonate for example, can be administered in conjunction with the compound of Formula I.
  • An admixture of the compound or salt of Formula I with one or more other uric acid lowering drugs, analgesics, and pH increasing agents can be administered to the subject.
  • the compound or salt of Formula I and the one or more other uric acid lowering drugs, analgesics, and pH increasing agents are not mixed together to form an admixture but are administered independently to the subject.
  • kits comprising one or more unit oral doses of a Compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, one or more unit oral doses of one or more other uric acid lowering drugs, analgesics, and pH increasing agents, and instructions for administering the Compound of Formula I or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof in combination with the other active ingredients.
  • the components of the kit are packaged together, such as in a box or a blister pack.
  • This invention provides a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and optionally a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • Further embodiments of the pharmaceutical composition of this invention comprise any one of the embodiments of the biologically active agents described above. In the interest of avoiding unnecessary redundancy, each such agent and group of agents is not being repeated, but they are incorporated into this description of pharmaceutical compositions as if they were repeated.
  • the composition is adapted for oral administration, e.g. in the form of a tablet, coated tablet, dragee, hard or soft gelatin capsule, solution, emulsion or suspension.
  • the oral composition will comprise from 1 mg to 2500 mg, more preferably from 1 mg to 1200 mg, preferably from 400 mg to 1000 mg, more preferably from 600 mg to 800 mg, more preferably from 600 mg to 1000 mg, of the compound of Formula I or its salt. It is convenient for the subject to swallow one or two tablets, coated tablets, dragees, or gelatin capsules per day.
  • the composition can also be adapted for administration by any other conventional means of systemic administration including rectally, e.g. in the form of suppositories, parenterally, e.g. in the form of injection solutions, or nasally.
  • the active ingredients can be processed with pharmaceutically inert, inorganic or organic carriers for the production of pharmaceutical compositions.
  • Lactose, corn starch or derivatives thereof, talc, stearic acid or its salts and the like can be used, for example, as such carriers for tablets, coated tablets, dragees and hard gelatin capsules.
  • Suitable carriers for soft gelatin capsules are, for example, vegetable oils, waxes, fats, semi-solid and liquid polyols and the like. Depending on the nature of the active ingredient no carriers are, however, usually required in the case of soft gelatin capsules, other than the soft gelatin itself.
  • Suitable carriers for the production of solutions and syrups are, for example, water, polyols, glycerol, vegetable oils and the like.
  • Suitable carriers for suppositories are, for example, natural or hardened oils, waxes, fats, semi-liquid or liquid polyols and the like.
  • compositions can, moreover, contain preservatives, solubilizers, stabilizers, wetting agents, emulsif ⁇ ers, sweeteners, colorants, flavorants, salts for varying the osmotic pressure, buffers, coating agents or antioxidants.
  • EXAMPLE 3 Compound BI increases uric acid excretion in urine of mice treated with the uricase inhibitor potassium oxonate
  • the model to induce hyperuricemia involves the use of the uricase (urate oxidase) inhibitor potassium oxonate that causes a delay in the degradation of uric acid to allantoin. Humans have little or no uricase activity, so inhibition of this enzyme with postassium oxonate makes mouse uric acid processing more similar to that of humans.
  • mice were given an intraperitoneal injection (i.p.) of potassium oxonate (300 mg/kg) that was suspended in 0.5% hydroxypropylmethylcellulose (HPMC). After 90 minutes, mice received treatments by oral administration of allopurinol (20 mg/kg; Sigma, Saint Louis, MO), benzbromarone (30 or 100 mg/kg; Sigma) or Compound BI (100 mg/kg) or vehicle (1% HPMC) and urine collection was started. Urine collection was performed at 1 , 3 and 5 hours after drug treatments and uric acid was measured with a colorimetric assay (Bio Vision Research Products, Mountain View, California).
  • Plasma samples taken immediately prior to and at 1, 2, 4, 6, 12 and 24 hours after a single, oral administration of a test compound to 4 healthy, normal men and women in each of three groups as described above in Example 1 were analyzed to determine uric acid levels.
  • Plasma samples taken at the time points indicated from patients receiving Compound BI at doses of 200, 400 or 800 mg were stored at -70 0 C and analyzed at a later time.
  • URATl (Uric Acid Transporter 1) is expressed on the apical membrane in renal tubules. It mediates the re -uptake of uric acid from the urine into the blood. Inhibition of URATl leads to increased excretion of uric acid in the urine, and is therefore a potential mode of action for drugs that lower serum uric acid concentrations.
  • Probenecid and Benzbromarone for example, have been used clinically for treatment of gout and hyperuricemia, and they both act on URATl to reduce uric acid reuptake.
  • benzbromarone was withdrawn from the market due to liver toxicity via mechanisms independent of URATl, and probenecid acts on numerous transporter proteins, resulting in interactions with a variety of other drugs.
  • An in vitro URATl assay is useful for identifying compounds with potential activity in lowering serum uric acid.
  • a suitable assay involves transfection of cells (e.g. human embryonic kidney cells; "HEK") with a vector encoding human URATl, followed by determination of the ability of trans fected cells to take up radiolabeled uric acid. The activity of compounds as URATl inhibitors is evaluated by their ability to block uric acid uptake by transfected cells.
  • Test Compounds and Chemicals Benzbromarone (Sigma, Cat.No.B5774), Probenecid (Sigma, Cat.No.P8761)), DMSO (Sigma, Cat.No.D-2650), [8- 14 C] Urate (50-60mCi/mmol; American Radio Chemicals, Cat. No. ARC0513).
  • hURAT 1 Subcloning of hURAT 1 into the expression vector: Plasmid vector pCMV6-XL5 containing hURAT 1 cDNA (Cat. No. SC 125624) and the expression vector pCMV6-Neo (Cat. No.pCMVNEO) were obtained from OriGene Technologies, Inc. The full-length hURATl cDNA was obtained from the vector pCMV6-XL5 and subcloned into the expression vector pCMV6-Neo to create the hURATl expression plasmid pCMV6-hURATl . The sequences were verified by automatic DNA sequencing.
  • HEK Human embryonic kidney 293 (HEK) cells (ATTCC, Cat No. CRL- 1573) were cultured in EMEM supplemented with 10% FBS and 2mM L-glutamine and incubated at 37° C and 5% CO 2 .
  • HEK Human embryonic kidney 293
  • EMEM fetal bovine serum
  • hURATl hURATl -HEK cells
  • mock-HEK cells cells having only the expression vector pCMV6-Neo
  • RT-PCR reverse transcription polymerase chain reaction
  • Reaction solutions containing the [8- 14 C] urate (55 mCi/mmol) at a final concentration of 50 ⁇ M were prepared with or without test compounds in Hanks' balanced salt solution (HBSS) containing 125 mM sodium gluconate, 4.8 mM potassium gluconate, 1.3 mM calcium, 5.6 mM glucose, 1.2 mM magnesium sulfate, 1.2 mM KH 2 PO 4 and 25 mM HEPES (pH7.4).
  • HBSS Hanks' balanced salt solution
  • the culture medium was removed and the cells were incubated for 5 min in 0.6 ml of HBSS. After that HBSS was removed, the prepared reaction solutions were added into each well and incubated for 5 min at room temperature.
  • IC50 and slope estimates with their 95% confidence limits were determined by a non- linear, least-squares regression analysis using the Data Analysis ToolboxTM (MDL Information Systems, San Leandro, CA, USA).
  • Step B Preparation of Ethyl 2-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-methoxyphenyl)acetate:
  • Step C Preparation of 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-methoxyphenyl)acetic acid:
  • Step B To a stirred solution of Ethyl 2-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-methoxyphenyl)acetate (Step B, 7.86 g, 24 mmol) in absolute ethanol (120 ml) was added IN NaOH (50 ml) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred for 3 hours, or until all the starting material is gone, concentrated and diluted with chloroform and acidified by IM HCl to bring the pH to 3.5-4.
  • Step A Preparation of Methyl 3-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-3-oxopropanoate:
  • Step A Preparation of Ethyl 3-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-3-oxopropanoate:
  • Step B Preparation of Diethyl 2-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)benzoyl)pentanedioate: To a solution of Ethyl 3-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-3-oxopropanoate (Step A, 5 g, 16.02 mmol) in t-butyl alcohol (50 ml) was added a solution of potassium tert-butoxide (IM in t-butyl alcohol, 1.988 g, 17.7 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred for 30 minutes at room temperature.
  • IM potassium tert-butoxide
  • Step B To a solution of Diethyl 2-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)benzoyl)pentanedioate (Step B, 1.66 g, 4.0 mmol) in methanol (50 ml) was added IN NaOH (17 ml) at the room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred for 14 hours or until all the starting material is gone, concentrated, diluted in chloroform, and washed with IM HCl to bring the pH to 3.5 to 4. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over Na 2 SO 4 , filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography eluted with chloroform: methanol (95:5 spiked with acetic acid) to give the title compound.
  • Step A Preparation of Ethyl 2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)acetate: The stirred solution of 2-(3-Hydroxyphenyl)acetic acid (25 g, 164.3 mmol) and p- Toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (3.49 g, 18.3 mmol) in abs ethanol (250 ml) was refluxed for 4 hours or until all the starting material is consumed. The reaction mixture was concentrated, diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with IM HCl. The organic layer was dried over Na 2 SO 4 , filtered, concentrated, and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hex: ethyl acetate 4:1) to give the title compound.
  • Step B Preparation of Ethyl 2-(3-(2,6-difluorobenzyloxy)phenyl)acetate:
  • Step C Preparation of 2-(3-(2,6-Difluorobenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid:
  • Step B Preparation of Ethyl 4-(3-(2,6-Dichlorobenzyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoate:
  • Step A To a stirred solution of 4-(2,6-Dichlorobenzyloxy)acetophenone (Step A, 12 g, 40.6 mmol) in dry THF (100 ml) and DMPU (30 ml) was added a solution of lithium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide (IM in THF, 47.21 ml) at -65 0 C under argon. After 10 minutes of stirring at -65 0 C, ethyl bromoacetate (10.18 g, 61 mmol) was added rapidly. The reaction mixture was stirred for an additional 10 minutes and then warmed to room temperature for 4 hours. The crude mixture was taken in ethyl acetate and washed with water and brine.
  • IM lithium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide
  • aqueous layer was extracted one more time with ethyl acetate.
  • the combined organic layers were dried over Na 2 SO 4 , filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (ethyl acetate: hexane, 1 :4) to provide the title compound.
  • Step C Preparation of 4-(3-(2,6-Dichlorobenzyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid:
  • Step A Preparation of Ethyl 2-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetate: A solution of 2,6-Dimethylbenzyl alcohol (5.25 g, 38.6 mmol) and diisopropyl azodicarboxylate (DIAD, 8.49 g, 42 mmol) in THF (30 ml) was added drop wise to a solution of Ethyl 3-hydroxyphenylacetate (6.66 g, 37 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (1 Ig, 42 mmol) in THF (100 ml). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 hours, diluted with ether and washed with water and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na 2 SO 4 , filtered, concentrated, and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hex: ethyl acetate 4:1) to give the title compound.
  • 2,6-Dimethylbenzyl alcohol 5.25 g, 38.6
  • Step B Preparation of Ethyl 4-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)propanoate:
  • aqueous layer was extracted one more time with ethyl acetate.
  • the combined organic layers were washed with brine, dried over Na 2 SO 4 , filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (ether: hexane, 1 :5) to provide the title compound.
  • Step C Preparation of 4-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)propanoic acid:
  • Step B Preparation of 2-(3-(4-(Trifluoromethyl)benzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid:
  • Step B Preparation of Ethyl 4-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)butanoate:
  • Step C Preparation of 4-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)butanoic acid:
  • Step A Preparation of Ethyl 2-(3-(3,5-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetate: To a stirred solution of Ethyl 2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)acetate (3 g, 16.6 mmol) in DMF (20 ml) was added potassium carbonate (2.99 g, 21.6 mmol) at room temperature followed by drop wise addition of 3,5-Dimethylbenzyl bromide (3.30 g, 16.6 mmol).
  • reaction mixture was stirred for 16 hours and taken in ethyl acetate, washed with water (2X), brine, dried over Na 2 SO 4 , filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hex: ethyl acetate 4:1) to give the title compound.
  • Step B Preparation of 2-(3-(3,5-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid:
  • Step B Preparation of 2-(3-(2,4-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid:
  • Step A Ethyl 2-(3-(2,4-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetate (Step A, .900 g, 3.0 mmol) in absolute ethanol (25 ml) was added IN NaOH (10 ml) at room temperature.
  • the reaction mixture was stirred for 3 hours, or until all the starting material is gone, concentrated and diluted with chloroform and acidified by IM HCl to bring the pH to 3.5- 4.
  • the organic layer was washed with brine, dried over Na 2 SO 4 , filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (chloroform: methanol, 95:5 spiked with acetic acid) to give the title compound as white solid.
  • Step B Preparation of 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethoxybenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid:
  • Step A Ethyl 2-(3-(benzyloxy)phenyl)acetate (Step A, 5.00 g, 18.5 mmol) in absolute ethanol (100 ml) was added IN NaOH (40 ml) at room temperature.
  • the reaction mixture was stirred for 3 hours, or until all the starting material is gone, concentrated and diluted with chloroform and acidified by IM HCl to bring the pH to 3.5- 4.
  • the organic layer was washed with brine, dried over Na 2 SO 4 , filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (chloroform: methanol, 95:5 spiked with acetic acid) to give the title compound as white solid.
  • Step B Ethyl 2-(2-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetate (Step B, 4.70 g, 15.7 mmol) in absolute ethanol (75 ml) was added IN NaOH (35 ml) at room temperature.
  • the reaction mixture was stirred for 3 hours, or until all the starting material is gone, concentrated and diluted with chloroform and acidified by IM HCl to bring the pH to 3.5-4.
  • the organic layer was washed with brine, dried over Na 2 SO 4 , filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (chloroform: methanol, 95:5 spiked with acetic acid) to give the title compound as white solid.
  • Step B Preparation of Ethyl 2-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetate:
  • Step D Preparation of 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)propanoic acid:
  • Step D Preparation of 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)butanoic acid:
  • Step B Preparation of 2-(3 -hydroxyphenyl)-2-methylpropanenitrile :
  • Step D Preparation of 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-2-methylpropanal:
  • reaction mixture was slowly quenched with ice cold water and the product was extracted with CH 2 Cl 2 (2X), the organic phase was washed with IM HCl, brine, dried over Na 2 SO 4 , filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hex: ether, 9: 1) to give the title compound.
  • Step E Preparation of 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-2-methylpropanoic acid:
  • Step A Preparation of 1 -(3 -methoxypheny ⁇ cyclopropanecarbonitrile :
  • Step B Preparation of l-(3-hydroxyphenyl)cyclopropanecarbonitrile:
  • Step C Preparation of l-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)cyclopropanecarbonitrile:
  • Step D Preparation of l-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)cyclopropanecarbaldehyde:
  • reaction mixture was slowly quenched with ice cold water and the product was extracted with CH 2 Cl 2 (2X), the organic phase was washed with IM HCl, brine, dried over Na 2 SO 4 , filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hex: ether, 9:1) to give the title compound.
  • Step E Preparation of l-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)cyclopropanecarboxylic acid:
  • Step D l-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)cyclopropanecarbaldehyde (Step D, 3.5g, 12.5mmol) in acetone (50ml) was added drop wise jones reagent (15ml) at room temperature.
  • the reaction mixture was stirred for 6 hours, diluted in EtOAc and washed with water, brine, dried over Na 2 SO 4 , filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (chloroform: methanol, 95:5 spiked with acetic acid) to give the title compound.
  • Step B Preparation of Ethyl 2-(3-(2-chloro-6-methylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetate:
  • Step D Preparation of Ethyl 2-(3-(2,6-dimethybenzyloxy)-4-methylphenyl)acetate:
  • Step C Preparation of 2-((5-(chloromethyl)-2-fluorophenoxy)methyl)-l,3- dimethylbenzene :
  • Step D Preparation of 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-fluorophenyl)acetonitrile:
  • Step E Preparation of 2-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-fluorophenyl)acetic acid: To a stirred solution of 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-fluorophenyl)acetonitrile (Step D, 1.44g, 5.34mmol) in ethanol (30ml) was added 2N NaOH (15ml) and reaction mixture was refluxed for 16 hours, cooled by adding ice and acidified with IN HCl to pH 4, and diluted with chloroform. The organic layer was dried over Na 2 SO 4 , filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (chloroform: methanol, 95:5) to give the title compound.
  • Rat plasma 0.1 mL was mixed with 0.2 mL Acetonitrile, vortexed 1 min, spun down 14000 rpm, 1700Og, at 4 0 C, for 25 min.
  • Step 1 Rat plasma from V2 and V3 animals ("vehicle", pooled), 0.19 mL, was mixed with 0.01 mL 2Ox stock of Compound EH in Methanol to make 500 microM, 250 microM, 125 microM, ..., concentrations of Compound EH in plasma.
  • Step 2 Samples from step 1 were vortexed for 10 sec at top speed.
  • Step 3 0.4 mL of acetonitrile was added to all samples from Step 2, and all vials were vortexed at top speed for 1 min.
  • Step 4 AU samples from step 3 were spun down 14000 rpm, 1700Og, at 4 0 C, for 25 min.
  • Step 5 Supernatants were filtered through 0.45micron, 4 mm, PTFE membrane syringe filter (Phenomenex # AF0-3102-52), 15 microL were injected and resolved on Luna 3 micron, IOOA pore, C8(2), 150x3mm, reverse phase column
  • EXAMPLE 28 Mouse oral single-dose pharmacokinetic study with Compound EH. Protocol: A. Plasma.
  • mice received single oral gavage of Compound EH, 100 mg/kg, and plasma was collected at certain times.
  • Mouse plasma 0.1 mL was mixed with 0.2 mL Acetonitrile, vortexed 1 min, spun down 14000 rpm, 1700Og, at 4 0 C, for 25 min.
  • Step 1 Plasma from "Vehicle” animals (pooled), 0.19 mL, was mixed with 0.01 mL 2Ox stock of Compound EH in Methanol to make 500 microM, 250 microM, 125 microM, ..., concentrations of Compound EH in plasma.
  • Step 2 Samples from step 1 were vortexed for 10 sec at top speed.
  • Step 3 0.4 mL of acetonitrile was added to all samples from Step 2, and all vials were vortexed at top speed for 1 min.
  • Step 4 AU samples from step 3 were spun down 14000 rpm, 1700Og, at 4 0 C, for 25 min. Step 5. Supernatants were filtered through 0.45micron, 4 mm, PTFE membrane syringe filter (Phenomenex # AFO-3102-52), 15 microL were injected and resolved on Luna 3 micron, IOOA pore, C8(2), 150x3mm, reverse phase column

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Food Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Inorganic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Emergency Medicine (AREA)
  • Botany (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • Physical Education & Sports Medicine (AREA)
  • Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
  • Rheumatology (AREA)
  • Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery (AREA)
  • Birds (AREA)
  • Zoology (AREA)
  • Nutrition Science (AREA)
  • Physiology (AREA)
  • Acyclic And Carbocyclic Compounds In Medicinal Compositions (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)
  • Organic Low-Molecular-Weight Compounds And Preparation Thereof (AREA)
  • Pyridine Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

Uric acid in mammalian subjects is reduced and excretion of uric acid is increased by administering a compound of Formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In Formula (I) m is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4; n is 0 or 1; m + n is not more than 4; t is 0 or 1; q is 0 or 1; and r is 0, 1 or 2. R6 is hydrogen, methyl or ethyl and R12 is hydrogen or methyl, or R6 is hydroxy and R12 is hydrogen, or R6 is O and R12 is absent, or R6 and R12 together are -CH2CH2-. R7 is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms. One of R8 and R9 is alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and the other is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms. R10 is hydrogen, halo, alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms. X is C(O) and r is 0 and t is 0; or X is NH(R11) wherein R11 is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms. A is phenyl, unsubstituted or substituted by 1 or 2 groups selected from halo, hydroxy, methyl, ethyl, perfluoromethyl, methoxy, ethoxy, and perfluoromethoxy; or a 5 or 6 membered heteroaromatic ring having 1 or 2 ring heteroatoms selected from N, S and O and the heteroaromatic ring is covalently bound to the remainder of the compound of Formula (I) by a ring carbon; or cycloalkyl having from 3 to 6 ring carbon atoms wherein the cycloalkyl is unsubstituted or one or two ring carbons are independently monosubstituted by methyl or ethyl. The uric acid-lowering effects of the Compounds of Formula (I) are used to treat or prevent a variety of conditions including gout, hyperuricemia, elevated levels of uric acid that do not meet the levels customarily justifying a diagnosis of hyperuricemia, renal dysfunction, kidney stones, cardiovascular disease, risk for developing cardiovascular disease, tumor-lysis syndrome, and cognitive impairment.

Description

COMPOUNDS AND METHOD FOR REDUCING URIC ACID
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Diseases caused by elevated levels of uric acid fall into two major categories: disorders caused by precipitation of uric acid crystals and diseases related to pathological effects of soluble uric acid. Gouty arthritis is the classic example of the former. Deposition of urate crystals in the kidney is also a common cause of renal dysfunction. Elevated levels of soluble uric acid are associated with a variety of disorders, including cardiovascular and renal diseases.
Gout is most commonly manifested as inflammation of one or more of the joints in the body resulting in mild to severe pain. These events may be episodic and/or chronic. Over time gout can result in the destruction of cartilage and bone, development of uric acid crystal deposits, kidney pain and dysfunction as well as kidney stones. Gout can affect other organs as well.
Gout is caused by hyperuricemia and the consequent formation and deposition of uric acid crystals in tissues, joints, kidneys and other organs. The uric acid comes from normal cell metabolism and from some types of foods and beverages. The excessive levels of uric acid are the result of too much uric acid production, impaired clearance by the kidneys (or a combination of excess production and impaired clearance), and also by some forms of medications taken for other health conditions. (Examples include diuretics, pyrazinamide, cyclosporine, low-dose aspirin, nicotinic acid and levodopa.). Many types of health conditions can also contribute to hyperuricemia and gout, including alcoholism, leukemia, lymphoma, lung cancer, tumor-lysis syndrome, smoking, psoriasis, obesity, kidney dysfunction, congestive heart failure, starvation, anemia, high blood pressure, diabetes, immobility, Lesch-Nyhan Syndrome, Down syndrome, and thyroid and parathyroid dysfunctions. Gout is generally divided into four categories based upon progressively more severe symptoms:
1) Asymptomatic. Elevated uric acid levels in the blood, but no overt symptoms.
2) Acute gouty arthritis: Sudden onset of symptoms, often in a single joint (commonly a big toe), and then involving other joints. Symptoms include pain, swelling, redness and fever.
3) Intercritical gout: Asymptomatic phases between gout attacks.
4) Chronic tophaceous gout: A chronic condition that may include frequent attacks, constant mild pain and inflammation of joints, destruction of cartilage and bone, development of uric acid crystal deposits, kidney dysfunction and kidney stones.
Medications currently used to treat the acute symptoms of gout include nonsteroidal antiinflammatory drugs, colchicine and corticosteroids. All of these medications can produce mild to severe side effects. Other treatments for these acute symptoms are being studied, including antibodies and antagonists to inflammatory cytokines such as Interleukin 1.
Other types of medication are used in order to try to reduce the incidence or severity of future attacks by reducing levels of uric acid. The three principal classes of medication are xanthine oxidase inhibitors (for example, allopurinol), which reduce production of uric acid from xanthine; uricosuric agents (for example, sulfinpyrazone, probenecid, benzbromarone and losartan), which are intended to improve excretion of uric acid by inhibiting reuptake of secreted uric acid in the renal tubules via inhibition of uric acid transporter 1 (URATl) (See also US Patent Application Publication No. 2007/0010670, published January 11, 2007 (Japan Tobacco Inc.)) or other elements of uric acid reuptake; and uricases, for example a pegylated-uricase such as PURICASE (Savient's pegylated recombinant mammalian uricase). These medications also often result in significant and undesirable side effects. For example, allopurinol has been reported to cause at least 100 cases of Stevens-Johnson/Toxic Epidermal Necrolysis and approximately 30 deaths each year in Europe (Halevy et al., Allopurinol is the most common cause of Stevens-Johnson syndrome and toxic epidermal necrolysis in Europe and Israel. J Am Acad Dermatol.
58(l):25-32, 2008 ). Probenicid and benzbromarone have been taken off the market in a number of countries due to undesirable side effects, such as liver failure in the case of benzbromarone. Patient compliance in taking these drugs is reportedly very poor (A. A. Reidel et al. "Compliance with Allopurinol Therapy among Managed Care Enrollees with Gout: A Retrospective Analysis of Administrative Claims." Journal of Rheumatology 2004; 31 :1575-1581), presumably because of the side effects and/or lack of benefit.
More than 5 million people in the U.S. have gout (National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey 111, 1988-1994). The prevalence of hyperuricemia and gout in the U.S. in 1999 was reported to be 41 per 1,000 and 14 per 1,000 in the U.K. (T.R. Mikuls et al., "Gout Epidemiology: Results for the UK General Practice Research Database, 1990- 1999." Annals of the Rheumatic Diseases 2005; 64:267-272). Subsequent reports indicate that the prevalence in the U. S, U.K. and other countries has been climbing steadily. (K. L. Wallace et al., "Increasing Prevalence of Gout and Hyperuricemia over 10 Years Among Older Adults in a Managed Care Population." Journal of Rheumatology 2004; 31 : 1582-1587). More recent data suggest that far more than 5 million Americans now have diagnosable gout. (E. Rrishnan et al., "Gout in Ambulatory Care Settings in the United States." Journal of Rheumatology 2008; 35(3): 498-501)
Hyperuricemia and gout are particularly significant issues in organ transplant recipients (Stamp, L., et al, "Gout in solid organ transplantation: a challenging clinical problem", Drugs (2005) 65(18): 2593-2611). Uric acid is often elevated in patients with renal transplants, and common immunosupressive drugs such as cyclosporine can cause particularly severe hyperuricemia. In transplant patients, allopurinol is contra-indicated due to interactions with some immunosupressants such as azathioprine, and due to bone marrow failure caused by the combination. Furthermore, elevated uric acid may contribute to graft failure (Armstrong, K.A. et al., "Does Uric Acid Have a Pathogenetic Role in Graft Dysfunction and Hypertension in Renal Transplant Patients?" Transplantation (2005) 80(11): 1565-1571). Therefore, there is a particularly acute need for safe agents that reduce hyperuricemia in transplant recipents.
Diseases related to elevated soluble uric acid often involve vascular problems: hypertension (Sundstrom et al., Relations of serum uric acid to longitudinal blood pressure tracking and hypertension incidence. Hypertension. 45(l):28-33, 2005), prehypertension (Syamela, S. et al., Association between serum uric acid and prehypertension among US adults. J Hypertens. 25 (8) 1583-1589, (2007), atherosclerosis (Ishizaka et al., Association between serum uric acid, metabolic syndrome, and carotid atherosclerosis in Japanese individuals. Arterioscler Thromb Vase Biol. (5): 1038-44, 2005), peripheral artery disease (Shankar, A. et al., Association between serum uric acid level and peripheral artery disease. Atherosclerosis doi 10: 1016, 2007), vascular inflammation (Zoccali et al., Uric acid and endothelial dysfunction in essential hypertension. J Am Soc Nephrol. 17(5): 1466-71, 2006), heart failure (Strasak, A.M. et al., Serum uric acid and risk of cardiovascular mortality: A prospective, long-term study of 83,683 Austrian men, Clin Chem. 54 (2) 273-284, 2008; Pascual-Figal, Hyperuricaemia and long-term outcome after hospital discharge in acute heart failure patients. Eur J Heart Fail. 2006 Oct 23; [Epub ahead of print]; Cengel, A., et al., "Serum uric Acid Levels as a Predictor of In-hospital Death in Patients Hospitalized for Decompensated Heart Failure." Acta Cardiol. (Oct. 2005) 60(5): 489-492), myocardial infarctions (Strasak, A.M. et al.; Bos et al., Uric acid is a risk factor for myocardial infarction and stroke: the Rotterdam study. Stroke. 2006 Jun; 37(6): 1503-7), renal dysfunction (Cirillo et al., Uric Acid, the metabolic syndrome, and renal disease. J Am Soc Nephrol. 17(12 Suppl 3):S165-8, 2006; Z. Avram and E. Krishnan, Hyperuricemia - where nephrology meets rheumatology. Rheumatology (Oxford), 47(7): 960-964, 2008), and strokes (Bos et al., 2006). Uric acid directly causes endothelial dysfunction (Kanellis, et al., Uric acid as a mediator of endothelial dysfunction, inflammation, and vascular disease. Semin Nephrol. 25(l):39-42, 2005; Khosla et al, Hyperuricemia induces endothelial dysfunction. Kidney Int. 67(5): 1739-42, 2005). In children and adolescents, early-onset essential hypertension is associated with elevated serum uric acid, and reduction of uric acid with allopurinol reduces blood pressure in these patients (Feig and Johnson, The role of uric acid in pediatric hypertension. J Ren Nutrition 17(1): 79-83, 2007; D.I. Feig et al., Effect of allopurinol on blood pressure of adolescents with newly diagnosed essential hypertension. JAMA 300(8): 924-932, 2008. Feig et al. also state that this is a new therapeutic approach but that the side effects of existing drugs to lower uric acid may limit or prevent their use. Hyperuricemia is an independent risk factor in all of these conditions.
Elevated soluble uric acid is also associated with or directly induces inflammatory responses. For example, uric acid is transported into vascular smooth muscle cells via organic acid transporters, especially the urate tranporter URATl , and then stimulates vascular smooth muscle cells to produce C-reactive protein, MCP-I and other cytokines, thereby stimulating proliferation and other changes associated with atherosclerosis (Price et al., Human vascular smooth muscle cells express a urate transporter. J Am Soc Nephrol. 17(7): 1791-5, 2006; Kang et al., Uric acid causes vascular smooth muscle cell proliferation by entering cells via a functional urate transporter. Am J Nephrol. 2005 25(5):425-33 (2005); Yamamoto et al., Allopurinol reduces neointimal hyperplasia in the carotid artery ligation model in spontaneously hypertensive rats. Hypertens. Res. 29 (11) 915-921, 2006), stimulates human mononuclear cells to produce IL- lβ, IL-6 and TNF-α, causes marked increases in TNF-α when infused into mice, activates endothelial cells and platelets, and increases platelet adhesiveness (Coutinho et al., "Associations of Serum Uric Acid with Markers of Inflammation, Metabolic Syndrome, and Subclinical Coronary Atherosclerosis", Amer. J. Hypertens. (2007) 20: 83-89; Levya, F., et al., "Uric Acid in Chronic Heart Failure: A Marker of Chronic Inflammation", Eur. Heart J. (1998) 19(12): 1814-1822.). Uric acid has also been shown to inhibit bioavailability of endothelial nitric oxide and activate the renin-angiotensin system. (T. S. Perlstein et al., Uric acid and the state of the intrarenal renin-angiotensin system in humans. Kidney International. 66:1465- 1470, 2004). Inokuchi et al. have shown that Interleukin 18 (IL-18) and other inflammatory agents reflect local inflammation associated with gout and that urate crystals accelerate activation of IL-18 (T. Inokuchi et al., Plasma IL-18 and other inflammatory cytokines in patients with gouty arthritis and monosodium urate monohydrate crystal-induced secretion of IL-18. Cytokine. 33(1): 21-27, 206), which appears to have a causative role in renal failure. IL-18 and other cytokines are also significantly elevated in people who do not have gout per se but who merely have elevated uric acid levels (C. Ruggiero et al. Uric acid and inflammatory markers. (C. Ruggiero et al., Uric acid and inflammatory markers. European Heart Journal. 27: 1174- 1181, 2006)
Hyperuricemia is also associated with cognitive impairment and other forms of central nervous system dysfunction. (Schretlen, D.J. et al., "Serum Uric Acid and Cognitive Function in Community-Dwelling Older Adults", Neuropsychology (Jan. 2007) 21(1): 136-140; Watanabe, S., et al., "Cerebral Oxidative Stress and Mitochondrial Dysfunction in Oxonate-Induced Hyperuricemic Mice", J. Health Science (2006) 52: 730-737).
Elevated serum uric acid levels are also associated with increased risk of cancer and cancer mortality. (Strasak, AM et al. (2007) Serum uric acid and risk of cancer mortality in a large prospective male cohort. Cancer Causes Control 18 (9) 1021-1029; Strasak, AM et al. (2007) The role of serum uric acid as an antioxidant protecting against cancer: prospective study in more than 28,000 older Austrian women. Annals Oncol 18 (11) 1893-1897; Jee, SA et al. (2004) Serum uric acid and risk of death from cancer, cardiovascular disease or all causes in men Eur. J. Cardiovascular Prev. Rehab. 11 (3) 185-191)
Elevated levels of uric acid are associated with prediabetes, insulin resistance, the development of Type 2 diabetes, and an increased probability of a variety of undesirable conditions in people with diabetes, such as peripheral artery disease, strokes, and increased mortality risk, (Ioachimescu, A. G. et al. (2007) Serum uric acid, mortality and glucose control in patients with Type 2 diabetes mellitus: a PreCIS database study Diabet. Med. 24 (12) 1369-1374; Perry, I.J. et al (1995) Prospective study of risk factors for development of non-insulin dependent diabetes in middle aged British men BMJ 310 (6979) 560-564; Chien, K-L et al. (2008) Plasma uric acid and the risk of Type 2 diabetes in a Chinese community Clin. Chem. 54 (2) 310-316; Sautin, Y. Y. et al. (2007) Adverse effects of the classic antioxidant uric acid in adipocytes: NADPH oxidase-mediated oxidative/nitrosative stress Am. J. Physiol. Cell Physiol.293: C584-C596; Tseng, CH. (2004) Independent association of uric acid levels with peripheral artery disease in Taiwanese patients with Type 2 diabetes Diabet. Med. 21 (7) 724-729; Lehto, S. et al. (1998) Serum uric acid is a strong predictor of stroke in patients with non-insulin dependent diabetes mellitus Stroke 29: 635-639.
Elevated levels of uric acid are a defining feature of Lesch-Nyhan Syndrome. People with sleep apnea or sleep-disordered breathing also have elevated of uric acid (Saito, H. et al., Tissue hypoxia in sleep apnea syndrome assessed by uric acid and adenosine. Chest 122: 1686-1694, 2002; Verhulst, S. L., et al., Sleep-disordered breathing and uric acid in overweight and obese children and adolescents. Chest 132: 76-80, 2007)
Elevated uric acid is associated with preeclampsia (Bainbridge, S.A. and Roberts, J.M., Uric acid as a pathogenic factor in preeclampsia. Placenta Dec. 17 2007 epub ahead of print). There is a significant medical need for new medications that can safely, conveniently and effectively treat and prevent disorders related to elevation of blood uric acid, whether such diseases are due to crystallization of uric acid or to effects of supranormal (whether by an individual or a population-based standard) levels of soluble uric acid.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
This invention concerns certain therapeutic uses of a Compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
Figure imgf000008_0001
In Formula I, m is 0, 1 , 2, 3 or 4; n is 0 or 1 ; m + n is not more than 4; t is 0 or 1; q is 0 or 1; and r is 0, 1 or 2. R6 is hydrogen, methyl or ethyl and R12 is hydrogen or methyl, or R6 is hydroxy and R12 is hydrogen, or R6 is O and R12 is absent, or R6 and R12 together are -CH2CH2- . R7 is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms. One of R8 and R9 is alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and the other is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms. R10 is hydrogen, halo, alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms. X is C(O) and r is 0 and t is 0; or X is NH(R11) wherein R11 hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms. A is phenyl, unsubstituted or substituted by 1 or 2 groups selected from halo, hydroxy, methyl, ethyl, perfluoromethyl, methoxy, ethoxy, and perfluoromethoxy; or a 5 or 6 membered heteroaromatic ring having 1 or 2 ring heteroatoms selected from N, S and O and the heteroaromatic ring is covalently bound to the remainder of the compound of Formula I by a ring carbon; or cycloalkyl having from 3 to 6 ring carbon atoms wherein the cycloalkyl is unsubstituted or one or two ring carbons are independently monosubstituted by methyl or ethyl. Esters and other prodrugs of compounds of Formula I are also included in this invention. This invention provides a method of reducing the uric acid concentration in blood of, or increasing uric acid excretion from, a mammalian subject, comprising administering to the subject a Compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof in an amount effective to reduce the uric acid concentration in blood of, or increase uric acid excretion from, the subject. This invention provides the use of a biologically active agent in the manufacture of a medicament for reducing the uric acid concentration in blood of, or increasing uric acid excretion from, a mammal wherein the agent is a Compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof and is formulated for administration in an amount effective to reduce the uric acid concentration in blood of, or increase uric acid excretion from, the subject. This invention provides a pharmaceutical composition for use in reducing the uric acid concentration in blood of, or increasing uric acid excretion from, a mammalian subject comprising a Compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof in an amount effective to reduce the uric acid concentration in blood of, or increase uric acid excretion from, the subject. This invention provides a kit comprising one or more unit oral doses of a Compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and instructions for administering the Compound of Formula I or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof to reduce the uric acid concentration in blood of, or increasing uric acid excretion from, a mammalian subject.
Reducing uric acid as described herein can be used to treat or prevent a variety of conditions including gout (any or all of: asymptomatic gout, acute gouty arthritis, intercritical gout, and chronic tophaceous gout), hyperuricemia, elevated levels of uric acid that do not meet the levels customarily justifying a diagnosis of hyperuricemia, renal dysfunction, kidney stones, cardiovascular disease, risk for developing cardiovascular disease and other consequences of hyperuricemia, cognitive impairment, and early-onset essential hypertension.
This invention is based on the observation that a compound of Formula I that was administered to humans reduced the level of uric acid in the blood of human patients and increased excretion of uric acid, as described in Examples 1 through 5. The in vivo experiments utilized a compound in which R6 is O. Because Compounds CF and CR are metabolites of Compound BI, it is believed that Compounds of Formula I in which R6 is hydrogen or hydroxy will also reduce in vivo blood levels of uric acid and increase excretion of uric acid. This invention is also based on the observation that compounds of Formula I, including compounds in which R6 is O, hydrogen or hydroxy, inhibited URATl in vitro, as shown in Example 6. Inhibition of URATl is an established in vitro model for lowering uric acid in vivo.
This invention also provides the following compounds, their pharmaceutically acceptable salts, esters and prodrugs:
DQ 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-methoxyphenyl)acetic acid; EB Methyl 3-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-3-oxopropanoate;
DR 2-(3-(2,6-Difluorobenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid;
DS 4-(3-(2,6-Dichlorobenzyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid;
DT 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)propanoic acid;
DU 2-(3-(4-Trifluoromethyl)benzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid; DV 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)butanoic acid;
DW 2-(3-(3,5-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid;
DX 2-(3-(2,4-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid;
DY 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethoxylbenzyloxy)phenyl)butanoic acid;
DZ 2-(3-(Benzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid; and EA 2-(2-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid.
EC 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)propanoic acid
ED 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)butanoic acid
EE 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-2-methylpropanoic acid
EF 1 -(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)cyclopropanecarboxylic acid EG 2-(3-(2-Chloro-6-methylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid
EH 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-methylphenyl)acetic acid
EI 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-fluorophenyl)acetic acid DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES
Figure 1 : Compound BI increases excretion of uric acid in urine of mice treated with the uricase inhibitor potassium oxonate.
Figure 2: Plasma UA (uric acid) levels over the initial 24-hour period in patients receiving various doses of Compound BI.
Figure 3: Plasma UA (uric acid) levels over a 24-hour period on Day 7 of patients receiving various doses of Compound BI.
Figure 4: Compound EH Calibration curve, AGILENT LC-MS.
Figure 5 : Compound EH concentration in rat plasma.
Figure 6: Compound EH concentration in mouse plasma
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
DEFINITIONS
As used herein the term "alkyl" means a linear or branched-chain alkyl group. An alkyl group identified as having a certain number of carbon atoms means any alkyl group having the specified number of carbons. For example, an alkyl having three carbon atoms can be propyl or isopropyl; and alkyl having four carbon atoms can be n-butyl, 1- methylpropyl, 2-methylpropyl or t-butyl.
As used herein the term "halo" refers to one or more of fluoro, chloro, and bromo.
As used herein the term "perfluoro" as in perfluoromethyl or perfluoromethoxy, means that the group in question has fluorine atoms in place of all of the hydrogen atoms.
The bond between R6 and the carbon atom to which it is directly bonded is depicted in Formula I above by a solid line together with a dashed line. This depiction reflects that the bond in question can be either a single bond, when R6 is hydrogen , methyl, ethyl or hydroxy, or a double bond, when R6 is O.
The asterisk in the depiction of Formula I above indicates a possible chiral center, and that carbon is chiral when R6 and R12 are different, i.e., when R6 is hydroxy, methyl or ethyl and R12 is hydrogen or when R6 is hydrogen, hydroxy or ethyl and R12 is methyl. In such cases, this invention provides the racemate, the (R) enantiomer, and the (S) enantiomer, of the Compounds of Formula I, all of which are believed to be active. In the synthesis examples a racemate is indicated by a wavy bond. Mixtures of these enantiomers can be separated by using HPLC, for example as described in Chirality 11 :420-425 (1999).
The term "prodrug(s)" of a compound of interest refers to other compounds that are cleaved, typically in vivo, to yield the compound of interest.
Certain chemical Compounds are referred to herein by their chemical name or by the two- letter code shown below. The compounds listed below are included within the scope of Formula I shown above.
BI 4-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutyric acid
CF 3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenylacetic acid
CR 4-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)-phenyl)-4(R)-hydroxybutanoic acid
DQ 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-methoxyphenyl)acetic acid
AN 4-(3-(2-Methylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid AW 4-(3-(2,6-Difluorobenzyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid
BJ 4-(3-(2-Fluoro-6-methylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid
BP 4-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-2,2-dimethyl-4-oxobutanoic acid
BS 4-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)butanoic acid
EB Methyl 3-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-3-oxopropanoate CD 5-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-5-oxopentanoic acid
CQ 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-2-oxoacetic acid
CK 5-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)pentanoic acid
CM 3-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)propanoic acid
DR 2-(3-(2,6-Difluorobenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid DS 4-(3-(2,6-Dichlorobenzyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid
DT 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)propanoic acid
DU 2-(3-(4-Trifluoromethyl)benzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid
DN 2-(3-(2,4-bis(trifluoromethyl)benzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid DV 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)butanoic acid
DW 2-(3-(3,5-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid
DX 2-(3-(2,4-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid
DY 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethoxylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid
DZ 2-(3-(Benzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid BH 4-(3-(Cyclopropylmethoxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid
DP 4-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzoyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid
AB 4-(4-(2-Methoxybenzyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid
AF 4-oxo-4-(4-(pyridin-2-ylmethoxy)phenyl)butanoic acid
AG 4-(4-(Benzyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid AH 4-(4-(2,6-Difluorobenzyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid
AI 4-(4-(2-Chlorobenzyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid
AM 4-(4-(2-((2-Fluorobenzyl)(methyl)amino)ethoxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid hydrochloride
AT 4-(4-(2,5-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid AY 4-(4-(2-Trifluoromethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid
BM 4-(4-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid
BT 4-(4-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)-3-methoxyphenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid
DO 2-(4-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid
EA 2-(2-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid EC 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)propanoic acid
ED 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)butanoic acid
EE 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-2-methylpropanoic acid
EF 1 -(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)cyclopropanecarboxylic acid
EG 2-(3-(2-Chloro-6-methylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid EH 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-methylphenyl)acetic acid
EI 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-fluorophenyl)acetic acid
As used herein the transitional term "comprising" is open-ended. A claim utilizing this term can contain elements in addition to those recited in such claim. As used in the claims the word "or" means "and/or" unless such reading does not make sense in context. So for example the phrase "reducing the uric acid concentration in blood of or increasing uric acid excretion from, a mammalian subject" is equivalent to "reducing the uric acid concentration in blood of and/or increasing uric acid excretion from, a mammalian subject.
COMPOUNDS OF THE INVENTION
In an embodiment of the invention described in the Summary above, A is substituted (as defined above) or unsubstituted phenyl, for example 2,6-dimethylphenyl. In other embodiments r is 1, t is 0, and q is 0. In another embodiment R10 is methoxy.
The two bulky substituents (i.e. other than R10) around the central phenyl ring can be located in the ortho, meta or para position with respect to one another. Preferably they are in the meta position with respect to one another.
In an embodiment of Formula I, A is substituted (as defined above) or unsubstituted phenyl, t is 0, q is 0, r is 1, R10 is hydrogen, n is 0, m is 0, 2 or 4. In a more specific embodiment A is 2,6-dimethylphenyl.
In an embodiment of this invention the Compound is represented by Formula IA. In a more specific embodiment the Compound is represented by Formula IAl . In Formula IA the variables are as defined above. In Formula IAl two of R1, R2, R3, R4 and R5 are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, hydroxy, methyl, ethyl, perfluoromethyl, methoxy, ethoxy and perfluoromethoxy, the remainder are hydrogen; and the other variables are as defined above. In more specific embodiments A is 2,6- dimethylphenyl, i.e. R1 is methyl and R5 is methyl. Nonlimiting examples of compounds of Formula I include Compounds AF, AG, AH, AT, BM, BT, DO and EA. Nonlimiting examples of compounds of Formula IA include Compounds BH, DP and EG.
Nonlimiting examples of compounds of Formula IAl include Compounds BI, CF, CR, DQ, AN, AW, BJ, BP, BS, EB, CD, CQ, CK, CM, DR, DS, DT, DU, DN, DV, DW, DX, DY and DZ, EB, EC, ED, EF, EH and EI. In an embodiment of Formula IAl, R10 is hydrogen, m is 0, 2 or 4; and n is 0. Preferably R1 is methyl and R5 is methyl.
Figure imgf000015_0001
Figure imgf000015_0002
The compounds of Formula I can be made in accordance with the reaction schemes below. In addition, many of the compounds of Formula I can be made according to methods described in WO 02/100341, WO 04/073611, WO 04/091486, WO 04/098496, WO 07/087506, WO 07/146768, and PCT/US2009/030845, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
REACTION SCHEMES
The compound of formula I where m is 0, q is 0 or 1 , t is 0 or 1 , and r is 0, 1 or 2, n is 0, R10 is hydrogen, halo, alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, R6 is hydrogen or methyl, or ethyl and R12 is hydrogen or methyl or R6 and R12 together are -CH2CH2-. One of R8 and R9 is alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and the other is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and X is C(O), r is 0 and t is 0; X is NH(R11) wherein R11 is hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. R7 is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, i.e. compounds of formula:
Figure imgf000016_0001
wherein A is described as above, can be prepared via reaction scheme of Scheme 1.
In the reaction scheme of Scheme 1 , A, q, t, m, n, r, R , R , R 10 and j r R> 12 are as „ a „1bov „e. r R> 13 is alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms. R 17 is alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms or benzyl group. R14 is chloro or bromo and Y is a halide.
The compound of formula II can be alkylated with the compound of formula III or with the compound of formula (IV) via reaction of step (a). The reaction is carried out in a suitable solvent, such as tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydrofuran/ l,3-dimethyl-3,4,5,6- tetrahydro-2 (lH)-pyrimidinone, toluene, N,N-dimethylformamide, tetrahydrofuran/ hexamethylphosphoramide and the like. Generally, the reaction is carried out in the presence of 2 to 3 molar equivalents of base to produce the compound of formula V where R6 is alkyl having 1 to 2 carbon atoms and R12 is hydrogen or 4 to 6 molar equivalents of base to produce the compounds of formula V where R6 and R12 are alkyl having 1 to 2 carbon atoms or together are -CH2CH2-. The conventional base for this purpose can be sodium hydride, potassium hydride, sodium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, potassium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide, lithium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide, lithium diisopropylamide and the like. In carrying out this reaction it is generally preferred to utilize aq. solution of tetrabutylammonium hydroxide and aq. sodium hydroxide. The reaction can be carried out at temperatures from -780C to 250C for 6 to 72 hours. The conventional techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography and recrystallization can be utilized to purify the product. In the case where R6 and R12 are hydrogens, the compound of Formula II can be converted to the compound of Formula VI by hydrolysis of nitriles to acid without the alkylation step A.
The compound of formula V can be converted to the compound of formula VI via reaction step (b) by acid or base hydrolysis. In carrying out this reaction it is generally preferred to utilize basic hydrolysis, for example aqueous sodium hydroxide. Any of the conditions conventionally used in hydrolysis of nitrile to produce carboxylic acid can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (b).
The compound of formula VI can be converted to the compound of formula VII by esterification of compound of formula VI with methanol, ethanol or propanol. The reaction can be carried out either by using catalyst for example H2SO4, TsOH and the like or by using dehydrating agent for example dicyclohexylcarbodiimide and the like. Any of the conditions conventional in such esterification reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (c).
In the case where X is C(O), the compound of formula VI can be reacted with the benzyl bromide in the presence of base for example, triethylamine, potassium carbonate to produce the compound of formula VII. Any conditions conventional in such reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (c). The compound of formula VII can be converted to the compound of formula XI first by de-alkoxylation by utilizing lewis acid for example BBr3 or BCl3 in dichloromethane or chloroform at low temperature for example -780C. Any of the conditions conventional in such reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction via the reaction of step (d).
In the second step, the product of reaction step (d) can be converted to the compound of formula XI via reaction of step (e) using Mitsunobu condensation with IX utilizing triphenylphosphine and diethyl azodicarboxylate or diisopropyl azodicarboxylate. The reaction is carried out in a suitable solvent for example tetrahydrofuran. Any of the conditions conventionally used in Mitsunobu reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (e).
In the case where X is C(O), the compound of formula VII can be reacted with the compound of formula IX in the presence of dehydrating agent for example dicyclohexylcarbodiimide. Any conditions conventional in such reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (e). The compound of formula XI can also be prepared by etherifying or alkylating the hydroxyl from step (d) with the compound of formula X via reaction of step (e). In the compound of formula X, Y, include but are not limited to mesyloxy, tosyloxy, chloro, bromo, iodo, and the like. Any conventional method of etherifying of a hydroxyl group by reaction with a leaving group can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (e).
In the case where X is C(O), the compound of formula VII can be reacted with the compound of formula X where Y is chloro. Generally, the reaction is carried out in the presence of base for example pyridine. Any conditions conventional in such reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (e). The compound of formula XI is the compound of formula I where m is 0, n is 0 and R7 is alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. The compound of formula XI can be converted to the compound of formula XII via reaction of step (f) where m is 0, n is 0 and R7 is H by ester hydrolysis. Any conventional method of ester hydrolysis will produce the compound of formula I where R7 is H.
In the case where X is C(O), the benzyl group can be removed by catalytic hydrogenation to give the compound of formula I where R7 is H. Any conditions conventional for catalytic hydrogenation reactions can be utilized to produce the compound of formula I.
IfA is phenyl substituted by 1 or 2 hydroxyl groups, it is generally preferred to protect the hydroxyl groups. The suitable protecting group can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene. The protecting group can be deprotected utilizing suitable deprotecting reagents such as those described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
Reaction Scheme 1
Figure imgf000019_0001
(C)
Figure imgf000019_0002
The compound of formula I where m is 1 to 4, q is 0 or 1 , t is 0 or 1 , and r is 0, 1 or 2, n is 0, R10 is hydrogen, halo, alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, R6 is hydrogen or methyl, or ethyl and R12 is hydrogen or methyl or R6 and R12 together are -CH2CH2-. One of R8 and R9 is alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and the other is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and X is C(O), r is 0 and t is 0; X is NH(R11) wherein R11 is hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. R7 is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, i.e. compounds of formula:
Figure imgf000019_0003
wherein A is described as above, can be prepared via reaction scheme of Scheme 2. In the reaction scheme of Scheme 2, A, q, t, m, r, R6, R7, R10 and R12 are as above, and Y is a halide. R17 is alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms or benzyl group. The compound of formula VII can be reduced to the compound of formula XIII via reaction of step (g). The reaction is carried out utilizing a conventional reducing agent for example alkali metal hydride such as lithium aluminum hydride. The reaction is carried out in a suitable solvent, such as tetrahydrofuran. Any of the conditions conventional in such reduction reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (g).
The compound of formula XIII can be converted to the compound of formula XIV by displacing hydroxyl group with a halogen group preferred halogen being bromo or chloro. Appropriate halogenating reagents include but are not limited to thionyl chloride, bromine, phosphorous tribromide, carbon tetrabromide and the like. Any conditions conventional in such halogenation reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (h).
The compound of formula XIV can be converted to the compound of formula XV by reacting Y with an alkali metal cyanide for example sodium, potassium or copper cyanide. The reaction is carried out in a suitable solvent, such as ethanol, dimethyl sulfoxide and the like. Any of the conditions conventionally used in the preparation of nitriles can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (i).
The compound of formula XV can be converted to the compound of formula XVI via reaction step (j) by acid or base hydrolysis. In carrying out this reaction it is generally preferred to utilize basic hydrolysis, for example aqueous sodium hydroxide in ethanol, tetrahydrofuran: water and the like. Any of the conditions conventionally used in hydrolysis of nitrile can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (j).
The compound of formula XVI can be converted to the compound of formula XVII via reaction of step (k) in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (c). The compound of formula XVII can be converted to the compound of formula XVIII via reaction of step (1) in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (d) and reaction of step (e).
The compound of formula XVIII is the compound of formula I where m is 1 , n is 0 and R7 is alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. The compound of formula XVIII can be converted to the compound of formula I where m is 1 , n is 0 and R7 is H in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (f).
The compound of formula XIV can be reacted with diethyl malonate utilizing a suitable base for example sodium hydride to give the compound of formula XIX. The reaction is carried out in suitable solvent, such as N,N-dimethylformamide, tetrahydrofuran and the like. Any of the conditions conventional in such alkylation reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (m).
The compound of formula XIX can be hydrolyzed and decarboxylated utilizing sodium hydroxide in suitable solvent, such as ethanol-water to give the compound of formula XX. Any of the conditions conventional in such reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (n). The compound of formula XX can be converted to the compound of formula XXI via reaction of step (o) in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (c).The compound of formula XXI can be converted to the compound of formula XXII via reaction of step (p) in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (d) and reaction of step (e).
The compound of formula XXII is the compound of formula I where m is 2, n is 0 and R7 is alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. The compound of formula XXII can be converted to the compound of formula I where m is 2, n is 0 and R7 is H in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (f).
The compound of formula XX can be reduced to give the compound of formula XXIII via reaction of step (q). This reaction can be carried out in the same manner as described hereinbefore in the reaction of step (g).
The compound of formula XXIII can be converted to the compound of formula XXIV via reaction of step (r) in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (h). The compound of formula XXIV can be converted to the compound of formula XXV via reaction of step (s) in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (i).
The compound of formula XXV can be converted to the compound of formula XXVI via reaction of step (t) in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (j).
The compound of formula XXVI can be converted to the compound of formula XXVII via reaction of step (u) in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (c).
The compound of formula XXVII can be converted to the compound of formula XXVIII via reaction of step (v) in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (d) and reaction of step (e). The compound of formula XXVIII is the compound of formula I where m is 3, n is 0 and R7 is alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. The compound of formula XXVIII can be converted to the compound of formula I where m is 3, n is 0 and R7 is H in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (f).
The compound of formula XXIV can be converted to the compound of formula XXIX via reaction of step (w) in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (m).
The compound of formula XXIX can be converted to the compound of formula XXX via reaction of step (x) in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (n).
The compound of formula XXX can be converted to the compound of formula XXXI via reaction of step (y) in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (c). The compound of formula XXXI can be converted to the compound of formula XXXII via reaction of step (z) in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (d) and reaction of step (e).
The compound of formula XXXII is the compound of formula I where m is 4, n is 0 and R7 is alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
The compound of formula XXXII can be converted to the compound of formula I where m is 4, n is 0 and R7 is H in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (f).
The products in all the steps can be isolated and purified by techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography, and recrystallization.
IfA is phenyl substituted by 1 or 2 hydroxyl groups, it is generally preferred to protect the hydroxyl groups. The suitable protecting group can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene. The protecting group can be deprotected utilizing suitable deprotecting reagents such as those described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
Remainder of this page intentionally left blank.
Reaction Scheme 2
Figure imgf000024_0001
(XXIX) (XXX) (XXXI) (XXXII)
The compound of formula I where m is O to 3, q is O or 1 , t is O or 1 , and r is O, 1 or 2, n is 1, R10 is hydrogen, halo, alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, R6 is hydrogen or methyl, or ethyl and R12 is hydrogen or methyl or R6 and R12 together are -CH2CH2-. One of R8 and R9 is alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and the other is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and X is C(O), r is O and t is 0; X is NH(R11) wherein R11 is hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. R7 is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, i.e. compounds of formula:
Figure imgf000025_0001
wherein A is described as above, can be prepared via reaction scheme of Scheme 3.
In the reaction scheme of Scheme 3, A, q, t, m, n, r, R7, R8, R9 and R10 are as above, p is 2 to 4, s is 1 to 3 and Y is a halide. R13 is alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. R15 is alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms or benzyl group.
The compound of formula XXXIII can be converted to the compound of formula XXXV via reaction of step (a') using Wittig reaction by treating the compound of formula XXXIII with the compound of formula XXXIV. Any conventional method of reacting an aldehyde with a triarylphosphine hydrohalide can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (a'). Any of the conditions conventional in Wittig reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (a').
The compound of formula XXXV can be converted to the compound of formula XXXVI by reduction of alkene via catalytic hydrogenation in the presence of transition metal catalyst for example, raney nickel, palladium-on-charcoal, platinum metal or its oxide under hydrogen atmosphere. Any of the conditions conventional in such catalytic hydrogenation can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (b'). The compound of formula XXXVI can be alkylated with the compound of formula III to produce the compound of formula XXXVII via reaction of step (c'). The reaction is carried out in a suitable solvent, such as tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydrofuran/ 1,3-dimethyl- 3,4,5, 6-tetrahydro-2 (lH)-pyrimidinone, terahydrofuran/hexamethylphosphoramide and the like. Generally, the reaction is carried out in the presence of 2 to 3 molar equivalents of base to produce the compound of formula XXXVII where one of R8 and R9 is alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms other is hydrogen or 4 to 6 molar equivalents of base to produce the compound of formula XXXVII where R8 and R9 are alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. The conventional base can be potassium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide, lithium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide, lithium diisopropylamide and the like. Generally, the reaction is carried out at temperatures from -780C to 250C for 6 to 72 hours. The conventional techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography and recrystallization can be utilized to purify the product.
In the compound of formula XXXVII, m is 0 to 3 and n is 1.
The compound of formula XXXVII can be converted to the compound of formula XXXVIII by de-alkoxylation by utilizing lewis acid for example BBr3 or BCl3 in dichloromethane or chloroform at low temperature for example -780C. Any of the conditions conventional in such reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (d').
The compound of formula XXXVIII can be converted to the compound of formula XXXIX via reaction of step (e') in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of steps (e).
The compound of formula XXXIX is the compound of formula I where m is 0 to 3, n is 1 and R7 is an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. The compound of formula XXXIX can be converted to the compound of formula XL via reaction of step (f ) in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of steps (f). The compound of XL is the compound of formula I where m is 0 to 3, n is 1 and R7 is H.
The conventional techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography and recrystallization can be utilized to purify the products. IfA is phenyl substituted by 1 or 2 hydroxyl groups, it is generally preferred to protect the hydroxyl groups. The suitable protecting group can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene. The protecting group can be deprotected after the reaction of step (e') utilizing suitable deprotecting reagents such as those described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene. Reaction Scheme '.
Figure imgf000027_0001
(C) R13Y(III)
CH2(CH2UCR8R9Jn-CO2R15 W CH2(CH2) m(CR8R9)n-CO2R15
(xxxviπ) OH OCH3 (XXXVII)
A(CH3)(CX) (CH^-OH (IX) or
(e-)
A(CH2)((X)q(CH2)r-Y (X)
Figure imgf000027_0002
(xxxrx) (XL)
The compound of formula I where m is O, q is O or 1 , t is O or 1 , and r is O, 1 or 2, n is 0, R10 is hydrogen, halo, alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, R6 is O and R12 is absent, R7 is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and one of R8 and R9 is alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and the other is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and X is C(O), r is 0 and t is 0; X is NH(R11) wherein R11 is hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, i.e. compounds of formula:
Figure imgf000027_0003
wherein A is described as above, can be prepared via reaction scheme of Scheme 4. In the reaction scheme of Scheme 4, A, q, t, r, R7 and R10 are as above. Y is a leaving group. The compound of formula XLI can be converted to the compound of formula XLII via reaction of step (g') using Mitsunobu condensation of XLI with IX using triphenylphosphine and diethyl azodicarboxylate or diisopropyl azodicarboxylate. The reaction is carried out in a suitable solvent for example tetrahydrofuran. Any of the conditions conventionally used in Mitsunobu reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (g').
The compound of formula XLII can also be prepared by etherifying or alkylating the compound of formula XLI with the compound of formula X via the reaction of step (h') by using suitable base such as potassium carbonate, sodium hydride, triethylamine, pyridine and the like. In the compound of formula X, Y, include but are not limited to mesyloxy, tosyloxy, chloro, bromo, iodo, and the like. Any conventional conditions to alkylate a hydroxyl group with a leaving group can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (h'). The reaction of step (h') is preferred over step (g') if compound of formula X is readily available. The compound of formula XLII can be converted to the compound of formula XLIV via reaction of step (i') by oxidation of methyl group with selenium dioxide (XLII) in the presence of pyridine. Generally the reaction is carried out at temperatures of from 250C-IOO0C. The product can be isolated and purified by techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography, and recrystallization. The compound of formula XLIV is the compound of formula I where m is 0, n is 0, R6 is O, R12 is absent and R7 is H.
The compound of formula XLIV can be converted to the compound of formula XLV by esterifϊcation of compound of formula XLIV with methanol, ethanol or propanol. The reaction can be carried out either by using catalyst for example H2SO4, TsOH and the like or by using dehydrating agent for example dicyclohexylcarbodiimide and the like. Any of the conditions conventional in such esterifϊcation reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (j').
The compound of formula XLV is the compound of formula I where m is 0, n is 0 and R7 is an alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. The product can be isolated and purified by techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography, and recrystallization. IfA is phenyl substituted by 1 or 2 hydroxyl groups, it is generally preferred to protect the hydroxyl groups. The suitable protecting group can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene. The protecting group can be deprotected utilizing suitable deprotecting reagents such as those described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
Reaction Scheme 4
Figure imgf000029_0001
(XLV)
The compound of formula I where m is 1 , q is O or 1 , t is O or 1 , and r is O, 1 or 2, n is 0, R , 10 is hydrogen, halo, alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, R is O and R , 12 is absent, R is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and one of R8 and R9 is alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and the other is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and X is C(O), r is 0 and t is 0; X is NH(R11) wherein R11 is hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, i.e. compounds of formula:
Figure imgf000030_0001
wherein A is described as above, can be prepared via reaction scheme of Scheme 5. In the reaction scheme of Scheme 5, A, q, t, r, R7 and R10 are as above. Y is a leaving group.
The compound of formula XLII (prepared in the same manner as described in the reaction of scheme 4) can be reacted with dialkyl carbonate via reaction of step (k') in the presence of a suitable base such as sodium hydride and the like. The reaction can be carried out in conventional solvents such as N, N'-dimethylformamide, tetrahydrofuran, dichloromethane and the like followed by addition of dialkyl carbonate such as dimethyl or diethyl or dipropyl carbonate to produce the corresponding compound of formula XLVI. Any conditions conventional in such alkylation reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (k'). The compound of formula XLVI is the compound of formula I where m is 1, n is 0, R6 is O, R12 is absent and R7 is alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. The compound of formula XLVI can be converted to the compound of formula XLVII via reaction step (1') in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (f). The compound of XLVII is the compound of formula I where m is 1, n is 0 and R7 is H. The conventional techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography and recrystallization can be utilized to purify the products.
IfA is phenyl substituted by 1 or 2 hydroxyl groups, it is generally preferred to protect the hydroxyl groups. The suitable protecting group can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene. The protecting group can be deprotected utilizing suitable deprotecting reagents such as those described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene. Reaction Scheme 5
Figure imgf000031_0001
(XLΠ) (XLVI) (XLVII)
The compound of formula I where m is 2 to 4, q is 0 or 1 , t is 0 or 1 , and r is 0, 1 or 2, n is
0, R , 10 is hydrogen, halo, alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, R is O and R , 12 is absent, R is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and one of R8 and R9 is alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and the other is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and X is C(O), r is 0 and t is 0; X is NH(R11) wherein R11 is hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, i.e. compounds of formula:
Figure imgf000031_0002
wherein A is described as above, can be prepared via reaction scheme of Scheme 6.
In the reaction scheme of Scheme 6, A, t, r, q, R7 and R10 are as above. R16 is alkyl group having 1 to 2 carbon atoms or benzyl group and p is 1 to 3. The compound of formula XLII (prepared in the same manner as described in the reaction of scheme 4) can be converted to the compound of formula XLIX via the reaction of step (m') by alkylating the compound of formula XLII with the compound of formula XLVIII. This reaction can be carried out in the presence of approximately a molar equivalent of a conventional base that converts acetophenone to 3-keto ester (i.e. gamma-keto ester). In carrying out this reaction it is generally preferred but not limited to utilize alkali metal salts of hexamethyldisilane such as lithium bis-(trimethylsilyl) amide and the like. Generally this reaction is carried out in inert solvents such as tetrahydrofuran: l,3-Dimethyl-3,4,5,6- tetrahydro-2 (lH)-pyrimidinone. Generally the reaction is carried out at temperatures of from -650C to 250C. Any of the conditions conventional in such alkylation reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (m').
The compound of formula XLIX can be converted to the compound of formula L via reaction of step (n') where X is NH(R11) wherein R11 is hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms and R7 is H by ester hydrolysis or compound of formula L where X is C(O) and r is 0 and t is 0 and R7 is H by catalytic hydrogenation. Any conventional methods of ester hydrolysis and catalytic hydrogenation to remove benzyl group can be utilized to produce the compound of formula L. The compound of formula L is the compound of formula I where m is 2 to 4, n is 0, R6 is O, R12 is absent and R7 is H.
The compound of formula L can be converted to the compound of formula LI via reaction of step (o') where R7 is alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms in the same manner as described in the reaction of step (c). The compound of formula LI is the compound of formula I where m is 2 to 4, n is 0 and R7 is alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. The conventional techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography and recrystallization can be utilized to purify the products.
IfA is phenyl substituted by 1 or 2 hydroxyl groups, it is generally preferred to protect the hydroxyl groups. The suitable protecting group can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene. The protecting group can be deprotected utilizing suitable deprotecting reagents such as those described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
Remainder of this page intentionally left blank.
Reaction Scheme 6
Figure imgf000033_0001
(XLΠ) (XLIX)
(n1)
Figure imgf000033_0002
(LI) (L)
The compound of formula I where m is O to 3, q is O or 1 , t is O or 1 , and r is O, 1 or 2, n is 1, R10 is hydrogen, halo, alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, R6 is O and R12 is absent, R7 is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and one of R8 and R9 is alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and the other is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and X is C(O), r is 0 and t is 0; X is NH(R11) wherein R11 is hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, i.e. compounds of formula:
Figure imgf000033_0003
wherein A is described as above, can be prepared via reaction scheme of Scheme 7.
In the reaction scheme of Scheme 7, A, t, r, m, n, q, R7, R8, R9 and R10 are as above and u is 1 to 4. R16 is alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms or benzyl group. R13 is alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and Y is a halide. The compound of formula LII can be converted to the compound of formula LIII in the same manner as described hereinbefore in the reaction of (c'). The compound of LIII is the compound of formula I where m is 0 to 3, n is 1 and R7 is alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. The compound of formula LIII can be converted to the compound of formula LIV via reaction of step (q') where X is NH(R11) wherein R11 is hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms and R7 is H by ester hydrolysis or compound of formula LIV where X is C(O) and r is 0 and t is 0 and R7 is H by catalytic hydrogenation. Any conventional methods of ester hydrolysis and catalytic hydrogenation can be utilized to produce the compound of formula LIV.
The compound of formula LIV is the compound of formula I where m is 0 to 3, n is 1, R6 is O, R12 is absent and R7 is H. The conventional techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography and recrystallization can be utilized to purify the products.
If A is phenyl substituted by 1 or 2 hydroxyl groups, it is generally preferred to protect the hydroxyl groups. The suitable protecting group can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene. The protecting group can be deprotected utilizing suitable deprotecting reagents such as those described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
Reaction Scheme 7
Figure imgf000034_0001
(LII) (LIII) (LIV)
The compound of formula I where m is 0, q is 0 or 1 , t is 0 or 1 , and r is 0, 1 or 2, n is 0, R10 is hydrogen, halo, alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, R6 is hydroxy and R12 is hydrogen, R7 is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and one of R8 and R9 is alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and the other is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and X is C(O), r is 0 and t is 0; X is NH(R11) wherein R11 is hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, i.e. compounds of formula:
Figure imgf000035_0001
wherein A is described as above, can be prepared via reaction scheme of Scheme 8. In the reaction of Scheme 8, A, t, r, q, R6, R7, and R10 are as above.
The compound of formula XLV (prepared in the same manner as described in the reaction of scheme 4) can be converted to the compound of formula LV via reaction of step (r') by hydrogenation of alpha-keto acid using catalyst for example rhodium- {amidophosphine- phosphinite} (Tetrahedron: Asymmetry, VoI 8, No. 7, 1083-1099, 1997),
[Ru2Cl4(BINAP)2](NEt3) (EP-A-O 295 890) and the like. Any conditions conventional in such hydrogenations can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (r'). Using HPLC can separate racemic mixtures of formula LV. (Chirality 11 :420-425 (1999). The compound of formula LV is the compound of formula I where m is 0, n is 0, R6 is hydroxyl, R12 is hydrogen and R7 is alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. The compound of formula LV can be converted to the compound of formula LVI where R7 is H in the same manner as described in the reaction of step (f).
The compound of formula LVI is the compound of formula I where m is 0, n is 0 and R7 is H. The product can be isolated and purified by techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography, and recrystallization.
IfA is phenyl substituted by 1 or 2 hydroxyl groups, it is generally preferred to protect the hydroxyl groups. The suitable protecting group can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene. The protecting group can be deprotected utilizing suitable deprotecting reagents such as those described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene. Reaction Scheme 8
Figure imgf000036_0001
Figure imgf000036_0002
O(CH2KX)q(CH2)tA (XLV) (LV) (LVI)
The compound of formula I where m is 1 , q is O or 1 , t is O or 1 , and r is O, 1 or 2, n is 0, R10 is hydrogen, halo, alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, R6 is hydroxy and R12 is hydrogen, R7 is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and one of R8 and R9 is alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and the other is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and X is C(O), r is 0 and t is 0; X is NH(R11) wherein R11 is hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, i.e. compounds of formula:
Figure imgf000036_0003
wherein A is described as above, can be prepared via reaction scheme of Scheme 9. In the reaction of Scheme 9, A, t, r, q, R7, and R10 are as above.
The compound of formula XLVI (prepared in the same manner as described in the reaction of scheme 5) can be converted the compound of formula LVII via reaction of step (f) by reducing the beta -keto group to an alcohol group. The reaction can be carried out by utilizing a conventional reducing agent that converts ketone to an alcohol for example, the reaction can be carried out by hydrogenation using a Raney nickel catalyst that had been treated with tartaric acid (Harada, T.; Izumi, Y. Chem Lett. 1978, 1195- 1196) or hydrogenation with a chiral homogeneous ruthenium catalyst (Akutagawa, S.; Kitamura, M.; Kumobayashi, H.; Noyori, R.; Ohkuma, T.; Sayo, N.; Takaya, M. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1987, 109, 5856-5858). The reduction can also be carried out by utilizing sodium borohydride in solvents such as methanol, ethanol and the like. Generally the reaction is carried out at temperatures from O0C to 250C. Racemic mixtures of formula LVII can be separated by using HPLC. (Chirality 11 :420-425 (1999).
The compound of formula LVII is the compound of formula I where m is 1, n is 0, R6 is hydroxyl, R12 is hydrogen and R7 is alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
The compound of formula LVII can be converted to compound of formula LVIII via reaction of step (u') where R7 is H in the same manner as described in the reaction of step (f). The compound of formula LVIII is the compound of formula I where m is 1 , n is 0 and R7 is H. The product can be isolated and purified by techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography, and recrystallization.
IfA is phenyl substituted by 1 or 2 hydroxyl groups, it is generally preferred to protect the hydroxyl groups. The suitable protecting group can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene. The protecting group can be deprotected utilizing suitable deprotecting reagents such as those described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
Reaction Scheme 9
Figure imgf000037_0001
O(CH2>(X)q(CH2)tA
(XLVI) (LVID (Lvm)
The compound of formula I where m is 2 to 4, q is 0 or 1 , t is 0 or 1 , and r is 0, 1 or 2, n is 0, R10 is hydrogen, halo, alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, R6 is hydroxy and R12 is hydrogen, R7 is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and one of R8 and R9 is alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and the other is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and X is C(O), r is 0 and t is 0; X is NH(R11) wherein R11 is hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, i.e. compounds of formula:
Figure imgf000038_0001
wherein A is described as above, can be prepared via reaction scheme of Scheme 10. In the reaction of Scheme 10, A, t, r, q, R7, and R10 are as above. R16 is alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms or benzyl group and p is 1 to 3.
The compound of formula XLIX (prepared in the same manner as described in the reaction of scheme 6) can be converted to the compound of formula LIX via reaction of step (v') by reducing the ketone group to an alcohol group. The reaction can be carried out by utilizing a conventional reducing agent that converts ketone to alcohol. In carrying out this reaction it is generally preferred but not limited to utilize sodium borohydride as the reducing agent. Generally this reaction is carried out in solvents such as methanol, ethanol and the like. Generally the reaction is carried out at temperatures of from O0C to 250C. The product can be isolated and purified by techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography, and recrystallization.
Racemic mixtures of formula LIX can be separated by using HPLC. (Chirality 11 :420- 425 (1999). The compound of formula LIX is the compound of formula I where m is 2 to 4, n is 0, R6 is hydroxy, R12 is hydrogen and R7 is an alkyl group having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
The compound of formula LIX can be converted to the compound of formula LX where R7 is H by ester hydrolysis or catalytic hydrogenation via reaction of step (w') in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (f). Any conventional methods of ester hydrolysis or catalytic hydrogenation will produce the compound of formula I where R1 is H. The product can be isolated and purified by techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography, and recrystallization. IfA is phenyl substituted by 1 or 2 hydroxyl groups, it is generally preferred to protect the hydroxyl groups. The suitable protecting group can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene. The protecting group can be deprotected utilizing suitable deprotecting reagents such as those described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
Reaction Scheme 10
Figure imgf000039_0001
Figure imgf000039_0002
O-(CH2)r(X)q-(CH2)t-A
(XLIX) (LIX) (LX)
The compound of formula I where m is O to 3, q is O or 1 , t is O or 1 , and r is 0, 1 or 2, n is 1, R10 is hydrogen, halo, alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, R6 is hydroxy and R12 is hydrogen, R7 is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and one of R8 and R9 is alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and the other is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and X is C(O), r is 0 aanndd tt iiss 00;; XX iiss NNHH((RR1111)) wherein R11 is hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, i.e. compounds of formula :
Figure imgf000039_0003
wherein A is described as above, can be prepared via reaction scheme of Scheme 11.
In the reaction of Scheme 11, A, t, r, q, R7, R8, R9 and R10 are as above. The compound of formula LIII (prepared in the same manner as described in the reaction of scheme 7) can be converted to the compound of formula LXI via reaction of step (x') in the same manner as described hereinbefore in the reaction of step (v'). Racemic mixtures of formula LXI can be separated by using HPLC. (Chirality 11 :420- 425 (1999). The compound of formula LXI is the compound of formula I where m is 0 to 3, n is 1, R6 is hydroxyl, R12 is H and R7 is alkyl group having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
The compound of formula LXI can be converted to the compound of formula LXII where R7 is H via reaction of step (y') in the same manner as described hereinbefore in the reaction of step (f ). The compound of formula LXII is the compound of formula I where m is 0 to 3, n is 1, R6 is hydroxyl, R12 is H and R7 is H.
The product can be isolated and purified by techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography, and recrystallization. IfA is phenyl substituted by 1 or 2 hydroxyl groups, it is generally preferred to protect the hydroxyl groups. The suitable protecting group can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene. The protecting group can be deprotected utilizing suitable deprotecting reagents such as those described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
Reaction Scheme 11 pCH(OHχCH2)m(CR8R9)nCO2H
Figure imgf000040_0002
Figure imgf000040_0001
(LIII) (LXI) (LXII)
The compound of formula IX, where t is 0 or 1, r is 0, 1 or 2 and q is 0, i.e. compounds of formula: A-(CH2)t(X)q(CH2)r-OH (IX)
and the compound of formula X, where t is 0 or 1, r is 0, 1 or 2 and q is 0, i.e. compounds of formula:
A-(CH2)t(X)q(CH2)r-Y (X)
can be prepared via reaction scheme of scheme 12.
In the reaction of Scheme 12, A is described as above. Y is a leaving group. The compound of formula LXIII can be reduced to the compound of formula LXIV via reaction of step (z'). The reaction is carried out utilizing a conventional reducing agent for example alkali metal hydride such as lithium aluminum hydride. The reaction is carried out in a suitable solvent, such as tetrahydrofuran. Any of the conditions conventional in such reduction reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (z'). The compound of formula LXIV is the compound of formula IX where t is 0 and r is 1.
The compound of formula LXIV can be converted to the compound of formula LXV by displacing hydroxyl group with a halogen group preferred halogen being bromo or chloro. Appropriate halogenating reagents include but are not limited to thionyl chloride, bromine, phosphorous tribromide, carbon tetrabromide and the like. Any conditions conventional in such halogenation reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (a").
The compound of formula LXV is the compound of formula X where t is 0 and r is 1. The compound of formula LXV can be converted to the compound of formula LXVI by reacting LXV with an alkali metal cyanide for example sodium or potassium cyanide. The reaction is carried out in a suitable solvent, such as ethanol, dimethyl sulfoxide. Any of the conditions conventionally used in the preparation of nitrile can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (b").
The compound of formula LXVI can be converted to the compound of formula LXVII via reaction step (c") by acid or base hydrolysis. In carrying out this reaction it is generally preferred to utilize basic hydrolysis, for example aqueous sodium hydroxide. Any of the conditions conventionally used in hydrolysis of nitrile can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (c").
The compound of formula LXVII can be reduced to give the compound of formula LXVIII via reaction of step (d"). This reaction can be carried out in the same manner as described hereinbefore in the reaction of step (z'). The compound of formula LXVIII is the compound of formula IX where t is 1 and r is 1.
The compound of formula LXVIII can be converted to the compound of formula LXIX via reaction of step (e") in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (a"). The compound of formula LXIX is the compound of formula X where t is 1 and r is 1.
The compound of formula LXIX can be converted to the compound of formula LXX via reaction of step (f ') in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (b"). The compound of formula LXX can be hydrolyzed by acid or base to give the compound of formula LXXI via reaction of step (g").
The compound of formula LXXI can be converted to the compound of formula LXXII via reaction of step (h' ') in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (z'). The compound of formula LXXII is the compound of formula IX where t is 1 and r is 2.
The compound of formula LXXII can be converted to the compound of formula LXXIII via reaction of step (i' ') in the same manner as described hereinbefore in connection with the reaction of step (a"). The compound of formula LXXIII is the compound of formula X where t is 1 and r is 2.
The product can be isolated and purified by techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography, and recrystallization. IfA is phenyl substituted by 1 or 2 hydroxyl groups, it is generally preferred to protect the hydroxyl groups. The suitable protecting group can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene.
Reaction Scheme 12
(zτ) (a") (b") (C) A-CO2H *> A-CH2-OH A-CH2-Y A-CH2-CN A-CH2-CO2H
(LXIII) (LXIV) (LXV) (LXVI) (LXVII)
(d")|
(f") (e")
A-CH2-CH2-CO2H - (S")
A-CH2-CH2-CN A-CH2-CH2-Y A-CH2-CH2-OH (LXXI) (LXX) (LXIX) (LXVIII)
(h") l
(i")
A-CH2-CH2-CH2-OH A-CH2-CH2-CH2-Y (LXXII) (LXXIII) The compound of formula IX, where t is 0 or 1, r is 0,1 or 2, q is 1 and X is NH(R11) wherein R11 is hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, i.e. compounds of formula:
A-(CH2)t(X)q(CH2)r-OH (IX)
and the compound of formula X, where t is 0 or 1, r is 0, 1 or 2, q is 1 and X is NH(R11) wherein R11 is hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, i.e. compounds of formula:
A-(CH2)t(X)q(CH2)r-Y (X)
can be prepared via reaction scheme of scheme 13.
In the reaction scheme of Scheme 13, A, t, r, and R11 are as above. Y is chloro or bromo. The compound of formula LXXIV can be mesylated to furnish the compound of formula LXXV via the reaction of step (j "). Any conventional conditions to carry out the mesylation reaction of a hydroxyl group can be utilized to carry out the step (j"). The compound of formula LXXV is then heated with the compound of formula LXXVI to produce the compound of formula LXXVII. Any of the conditions conventional to produce amino alcohols can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (k' '). The compound of formula LXXVII is the compound of formula IX.
In the compound of formula LXXVII, alcohol can be displaced by chloro or bromo by treating the compound of formula LXXVII with thionyl chloride, bromine, phosphorus tribromide, oxalyl chloride, carbon tetrabromide and the like to produce the compound of formula LXXVIII. Any conventional method to displace alcohol with chloro or bromo can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (1"). The compound of formula LXXVIII is the compound of formula X.
IfA is phenyl substituted by 1 or 2 hydroxyl groups, it is generally preferred to protect the hydroxyl groups. The suitable protecting group can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene. The protecting group can be deprotected utilizing suitable deprotecting reagents such as those described in Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene. Reaction Scheme 13
G") (k")
A(CH2)t-OH A(CH2)t-OMs — ^ A(CH I22))t-N-(CH2X-OH (LXXIV) (LXXV) R11-NH-(CH2)r-OH (L Jt-N-(CH2)r-( XXVII)
(LXXVI)
(1")
Figure imgf000044_0001
(LXXVΠI)
The compound of formula II where R , 10 is hydrogen, halo, alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, i.e. compounds of formula:
Figure imgf000044_0002
can be prepared via reaction scheme of scheme 14.
In the reaction scheme of Scheme 14, R10 is as above. Y is a halide. The compound of formula LXXIX can be converted to the compound of formula LXXX via reaction of step (m") by alkylation of carboxylic acid and alcohol in the presence of base for example potassium carbonate by using methyl iodide in aprotic solvent for example N, N- dimethylformamide. Any conventional conditions of such alkylations can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (m").
The compound of formula LXXX can be reduced to give the compound of formula LXXXI via reaction of step (n"). The reaction is carried out utilizing a conventional reducing agent for example alkali metal hydride such as lithium aluminum hydride. The reaction is carried out in a suitable solvent, such as tetrahydrofuran and the like. Any of the conditions conventional in such reduction reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (n"). The compound of formula LXXXI can be converted to the compound of formula LXXXII by displacing hydroxyl group with a halogen group preferred halogen being bromo or chloro. Appropriate halogenating reagents include but are not limited to thionyl chloride, bromine, phosphorous tribromide, carbon tetrabromide and the like. Any conditions conventional in such halogenation reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (o").
The compound of formula LXXXII can be converted to the compound of formula II by reacting LXXXII with alkali metal cyanide for example sodium, potassium, and copper cyanide. The reaction is carried out in a suitable solvent, such as ethanol, dimethyl sulfoxide. Any of the conditions conventionally used in the preparation of nitriles can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (p").
Reaction Scheme 14
Figure imgf000045_0001
The compound of formula XXXIII where R , 10 is hydrogen, halo, alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, i.e. compounds of formula:
Figure imgf000046_0001
(XXXIII)
can be prepared via reaction scheme of scheme 15.
In the reaction scheme of Scheme 15, R10 is as above. The compound of formula LXXXI can be converted to the compound of formula XXXIII via reaction of step (q' ') by oxidation of alcohol to the aldehyde. The reaction can be carried out utilizing a suitable oxidizing agent for example pyridinium chlorochromate, or dimethyl sulfoxide activated by 2,4,6-trichloro[l,3,5]-triazine (cyanuric chloride, TCT) under Swern oxidation conditions (J.O.C. 2001, 66, 7907-7909) and the like. Any of the conditions conventional in such oxidation reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (q").
Reaction Scheme 15
Figure imgf000046_0002
(LXXXI) (XXXIII)
The compound of formula XXXIV where p is 2 to 4 and R15 is alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms or benzyl group, i.e. compounds of formula:
Ph,P+-(CH?)pCO?R15}Br
(XXXIV) can be prepared via reaction of scheme 16.
In the reaction scheme of Scheme 16, R15 and p are as above. The compound of formula LXXXIII can be reacted with the compound of formula LXXXIV via the reaction of step (r") to give compound of formula XXXIV. Any of the conditions conventionally used in reacting triphenylphosphine with hydrohalide can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (r").
Reaction Scheme 16
(r")
(C6H5)3P + Br-(CH2)pCO2R15 Ph3P+-(CH2)PCO2R15) Br-
(LXXXIII) (LXXXIV) (XXXIV)
The compound of formula XLI where R10 is hydrogen, halo, alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, i.e. compounds of formula:
Figure imgf000047_0001
can be prepared via reaction scheme of scheme 17.
In the reaction scheme of Scheme 17, R10 is as above. The compound of formula XLI can be synthesized according to the method of George M Rubottom et al., J. Org. Chem. 1983, 48, 1550-1552.
Reaction Scheme 17
Figure imgf000047_0002
(LXXIX)
Figure imgf000047_0003
The compound of formula LXXIX where R10 is halo, i.e. compounds of formula:
Figure imgf000048_0001
(LXXIX)
are either commercially available or can be prepared according to the methods described in the literature as follows:
1. 3-Br or F-2-OHC6H3CO2H
Canadian Journal of Chemistry (2001), 79(11) 1541-1545. 2. 4-Br^-OHC6H3CO2H
WO 9916747 or JP 04154773.
3. 2-Br-O-OHC6H3CO2H JP 47039101.
4. 2-Br-3-OHC6H3CO2H WO 9628423.
5. 4-Br-3-OHC6H3CO2H WO 2001002388.
6. 3-Br-5-OHC6H3CO2H
Journal of labelled Compounds and Radiopharmaceuticals (1992), 31 (3), 175-82. 7. 2-Br-5-OHC6H3CO2H and 3-0-4-0HC6H3CO2H WO 9405153 and US 5519133.
8. 2-BM-OHC6H3CO2H and 3-BM-OHC6H3CO2H WO 20022018323
9. 2-Cl-O-OHC6H3CO2H JP 06293700
10. 2-0-3-0HC6H3CO2H
Proceedings of the Indiana Academy of Science (1983), Volume date 1982, 92, 145-51. 11. 3-0-5-0HC6H3CO2H WO 2002000633 and WO 2002044145. 12. 2-0-5-0HC6H3CO2H WO 9745400.
13. 5-1-2-OHC6H3CO2H and 3-1, 2-OHC6H3CO2H Z. Chem. (1976), 16(8), 319-320. 14. 4-1-2-OHC6H3CO2H
Journal of Chemical Research, Synopses (1994), (11), 405.
15. 6-1-2-OHC6H3CO2H US 4932999.
16. 2-1-3-OHC6H3CO2H and 4-1-3-OHC6H3CO2H WO 9912928.
17. 5-1-3-OHC6H3CO2H
J. Med. Chem. (1973), 16(6), 684-7.
18. 2-1-4-OHC6H3CO2H
Collection of Czechoslovak Chemical Communications, (1991), 56(2), 459-77. 19. 3-1-4-OHC6H3CO2,
J.O.C. (1990), 55(18), 5287-91.
The compound of formula LXXIX, where R10 is alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, i.e. compounds of formula:
Figure imgf000049_0001
(LXXIX)
can be synthesized via the reaction of scheme 18.
In the reaction of scheme 18, R15 is alkyl group having from 1 to 2 carbon atoms. P is a hydroxyl protecting group. The compound of formula LXXXV can be converted to the compound of formula LXXXVI via reaction of step (t") by protecting phenol group by suitable protecting group. The suitable conditions for the protecting group can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T. Greene. The compound of formula LXXXVI can be converted to the compound of formula LXXXVII by oxidation of aldehyde to carboxylic acid. The reaction can be carried out by using suitable oxidizing reagents for example, pyridinium chlorochromate, potassium permanganate, sodium permanganate and the like. Any of the conditions suitable in such oxidation reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (u").
The compound of formula LXXXVII can be converted to the compound of formula LXXIX via reaction of step (v' ') where R10 is alkoxy having 1 carbon atom by deprotection of protecting group. The suitable deprotecting conditions can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T Greene.
The compound of formula LXXXVII can be converted to the compound of formula LXXXVIII by treating the compound of formula LXXXVII with boron tribromide or boron trichloride using solvent for example dichloromethane for 4 to 48 hours at the temperature from -720C to O0C. Any of the conditions conventional in such reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (w' ').
The compound of formula LXXXVIII can be converted to the compound of formula LXXXIX by esterifϊcation of compound of formula LXXXVIII with methanol or ethanol. The reaction can be carried out either by using catalysts for example H2SO4, TsOH and the like or by using dehydrating agent for example dicyclohexylcarbodiimide and the like. Any of the conditions conventional in such esterifϊcation reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (x").
The compound of formula LXXXIX can be converted to the compound of formula LXXXX by etherifying or alkylating the compound of formula LXXXIX with alkyl halide having 2 to 3 carbon atoms by using suitable base for example potassium carbonate, sodium hydride, pyridine and the like. The reaction can be carried out in conventional solvents, such as terahydrofuran, N, N-dimethylformamide, dichloromethane and the like. The reaction is generally carried out at temperatures from O0C to 4O0C. Any of the conditions suitable in such alkylation reactions can be utilized to carry out the reaction of step (y "). The compound of formula LXXXX can be converted to the compound of formula LXXIX via reaction of step (z") where R10 is alkoxy having 2 to 3 carbon atoms by deprotection of protecting group. The suitable deprotecting conditions can be described in the Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis by T Greene.
The product can be isolated and purified by techniques such as extraction, evaporation, chromatography, and recrystallization.
Reaction Scheme 18
Figure imgf000051_0001
The compound of formula LXXIX, where R , 10 is alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, i.e. compounds of formula:
Figure imgf000051_0002
(LXXIX) are either commercially available or can be prepared according to the methods described in the literature as follows:
1. 2-OMe^-OHC6H3CO2H US 2001034343 or WO 9725992.
2. 5-OMe-3-OHC6H3CO2H J.O.C (2001), 66(23), 7883-88.
3. 2-OMe-5-OHC6H3CO2H
US 6194406 (Page 96) and Journal of the American Chemical Society (1985), 107(8), 2571-3.
4. 3-OEt-5-OHC6H3CO2H Taiwan Kexue (1996), 49(1), 51-56.
5. 4-OEt-3-OHC6H3CO2H WO 9626176 6. 2-OEM-OHC6H3CO2H
Takeda Kenkyusho Nempo (1965), 24,221-8.
JP 07070025.
7. 3-OEM-OHC6H3CO2H
WO 9626176. 8. 3-OPr-2-OHC6H3CO2H
JP 07206658, DE 2749518.
9. 4-OPr-2-OHC6H3CO2H
Farmacia (Bucharest) (1970), 18(8), 461-6.
JP 08119959. 10. 2-OPr-5-OHC6H3CO2H and 2-OEt-5-OHC6H3CO2H
Adapt synthesis from US 6194406 (Page 96) by using propyl iodide and ethyl iodide.
11. 4-OPr-3-OHC6H3CO2H Adapt synthesis from WO 9626176
12. 2-OPM-OHC6H3CO2H Adapt synthesis from Takeda Kenkyusho Nempo (1965), 24,221-8 by using propyl halide.
13. 4-OEt-3-OHC6H3CO2H
Biomedical Mass Spectrometry (1985), 12(4), 163-9.
14. 3-OPr-5-OHC6H3CO2H Adapt synthesis from Taiwan Kexue (1996), 49(1), 51-56 by using propyl halide.
The compound of formula LXXIX, where R10 is an alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, i.e. compounds of formula:
Figure imgf000053_0001
(LXXIX)
are either commercially available or can be prepared according to the methods described in the literature as follows:
1. 5-Me-3-OHC6H3CO2H and 2-Me-5-OHC6H3CO2H WO 9619437.
J.O.C. 2001, 66, 7883-88.
2. 2-Me-4-OHC6H3CO2H WO 8503701.
3. 3-Et-2-OHC6H3CO2H and 5-Et-2-OHC6H3CO2H J. Med. Chem. (1971), 14(3), 265.
4. 4-Et-2-OHC6H3CO2H
Yaoxue Xuebao (1998), 33(1), 67-71. 5. 2-Et-O-OHC6H3CO2H and 2-n-Pr-6-OHC6H3CO2H J. Chem. Soc, Perkin Trans 1 (1979), (8), 2069-78.
6. 2-Et-3-OHC6H3CO2H
JP 10087489 and WO 9628423.
7. 4-Et-3-OHC6H3CO2H J.O.C. 2001, 66, 7883-88.
WO 9504046.
8. 2-Et-5-OHC6H3CO2H J.A.C.S (1974), 96(7), 2121-9.
9. 2-EM-OHC6H3CO2H and 3-Et-4-OHC6H3CO2H JP 04282345. 10. 3-n-Pr-2-OHC6H3CO2H
J.O.C (1991), 56(14), 4525-29.
11. 4-n-Pr-2-OHC6H3CO2H EP 279630. 12. 5-n-Pr-2-OHC6H3CO2H
J. Med. Chem (1981), 24(10), 1245-49.
13. 2-n-Pr-3-OHC6H3CO2H WO 9509843 and WO 9628423.
14. 4-n-Pr-3-OHC6H3CO2H WO 9504046.
15. 2-n-Pr-5-OHC6H3CO2H
Synthesis can be adapted from J.A.C.S (1974), 96(7), 2121-9 by using ethyl alpha formyl valerate.
16. 3-n-Pr-4-OHC6H3CO2H Polymer (1991), 32(11) 2096-105.
17. 2-n-Pr-4-OHC6H3CO2H
3-Propylphenol can be methylated to 3-Propylanisole, which was then formylated to 4- Methoxy-3-benzaldehyde. The aldehyde can be oxidized by Jone's reagent to give corresponding acid and deprotection of methyl group by BBr3 will give the title compound.
18. 1. 3-Et-5-OHC6H3CO2H and 3-Pr-n-5-OHC6H3CO2H
Adapt synthesis from J.O.C. 2001, 66, 7883-88 by using 2-Ethylacrolein and 2- Propylacrolein.
USE IN METHODS OF TREATMENT
This invention provides a method for reducing uric acid levels in a mammalian subject or increasing uric acid excretion from a mammalian subject. The level of uric acid in a mammal can be determined using any conventional measure. Typically the level of uric acid in the blood is determined. Uric acid can also be deposited or precipitated in tissues, resulting in depots (e.g. tophi) that can be affected by raising or lowering blood uric acid concentrations, and which conversely can contribute to circulating uric acid. The method of this invention for reducing uric acid can be used to treat or prevent a variety of conditions including gout, hyperuricemia, elevated levels of uric acid that do not meet the levels customarily justifying a diagnosis of hyperuricemia, kidney stones, renal dysfunction, cardiovascular disease, cardiovascular risk factor, and cognitive impairment. By lowering uric acid levels, administration of the compounds of Formula I slows progression of kidney disease. An elevated uric acid level has been identified as a risk factor for cardiovascular disease. A significant correlation has been shown between elevated uric acid and cognitive impairment in older adults. (Schretlen, D.J. et al., "Serum Uric Acid and Cognitive Function in Community-Dwelling Older Adults", Neuropsychology (Jan. 2007) 21(1): 136-140). Accordingly, the method of this invention for reducing uric acid can be used to treat or prevent cognitive impairment, including cognitive impairment in elderly adults. It is well known that people with Lesch-Nyhan Syndrome have elevated levels of uric acid and suffer the numerous consequences of this hyperuricemia, including gout. Thus, this invention for reducing blood levels and increasing elimination of uric acid can be used to treat people with Lesch-Nyhan Syndrome.
The normal range of uric acid in blood is between 3.4 mg/dL and 7.0 mg/dL in men, between 2.4 mg/dL and 6.0 mg/dL in premenopausal women, and from 2.5 mg/dL to 5.5 mg/dL in children. Urate crystal formation/precipitation typically occurs in men at levels of 6.6 mg/dL or higher and in women at levels of 6.0 mg/dL or higher. This illustrates that levels of uric acid that are within the so-called normal range can have undesirable health consequences, even producing gout. Also, what may be in the normal range for the population as a whole may be elevated for the individual. Cardiovascular and other consequences of elevated uric acid can occur with blood levels well within these "normal" ranges. Therefore, a diagnosis of hyperuricemia is not necessarily a prerequisite for the beneficial effects of the compounds of the invention.
This invention includes the treatment of hyperuricemia associated with gout, hypertension, vascular inflammation, heart failure, arterio-venous disorders, myocardial infarct, stroke, pre-eclampsia, eclampsia, sleep apnea, renal dysfunction (including renal failure, end stage renal disease [ESRD]), organ transplant, diuretics, thiazides, cyclosporine, aspirin, vitamin C, nicotinic acid, levodopa (L-DOPA), cytotosic drugs, and certain antibacterial agents (such as pyrozinamide), cirrhosis, thyroid dysfunction, parathyroid dysfunction, lung cancer, anemia, leukemia, lymphoma, multiple myeloma, tumor-lysis syndrome, thyroid or parathyroid dysfunction, Lesch-Nyhan Syndrome, smoking, alcohol consumption, and psoriasis. This invention includes the treatment of hyperuricemia that can lead to gout, formation of urate crystals, renal dysfunction, graft or organ failure following transplant, endothelial disorders (such as inflammation), chronic heart failure, arterio-venous disorders, pre-eclampsia, eclampsia, hypertension, and cognitive impairment. In embodiments of the method of this invention for treating gout, tissue deposits of uric acid, including but not limited to tophi, are reduced, and the incidence and severity of gout flares are also reduced.
The Compound of Formula I or salt thereof can be administered by any conventional route of systemic administration. Preferably they are administered orally. Accordingly, it is preferred for the medicament to be formulated for oral administration. Other routes of administration that can be used in accordance with this invention include rectally, parenterally, by injection (e.g. intravenous, subcutaneous, intramuscular or intraperitioneal injection), or nasally.
Further embodiments of each of the uses and methods of treatment of this invention comprise administering any of the embodiments of the Compound of Formula I or pharmaceutically salts thereof. In the interest of avoiding unnecessary redundancy, each such agent and group of agents is not being repeated, but they are incorporated into this description of uses and methods of treatment as if they were repeated.
Both human and non-human mammalian subjects can be treated in accordance with the treatment method of this invention. The optimal dose of a particular active agent of the invention for a particular subject can be determined in the clinical setting by a skilled clinician. In the case of oral administration the Compound of Formula I or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is generally administered to adults in a daily dose of from 1 mg to 2500 mg, more preferably from 1 mg to 1200 mg, more preferably from 400 mg to 1000 mg, more preferably from 600 mg to 800 mg, more preferably from 600 mg to 1000 mg, administered once or twice per day. The average body weight of a typical adult is 60 to 70 kilograms, so that appropriate dose ranges expressed as mg/kg are approximately from 0.015 to 42 mg/kg, more preferably from 0.015 to 20 mg/kg, more preferably from 6.6 to 13 mg/kg, more preferably from 10 to 13 mg/kg mg, more preferably from 10 to 16 mg/kg, administered once or twice per day. When treating children the optimal dose is determined by the patient's physician. In the case of oral administration to a mouse the Compound of Formula I or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is generally administered in a daily dose from 1 to 300 mg of the agent per kilogram of body weight. In view of the potency of Compound EH (See Example 6, Table 6), the dosage ranges listed above should be decreased by a factor of about 10.
The Compound of Formula I or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be administered in combination with other uric acid lowering drugs. In such cases the dose of the Compound of Formula I or its salts is as described above. Any conventional or investigational uric acid lowering drug can be utilized in combination with the compounds of Formula I. Examples of such drugs include xanthine oxidase inhibitors such as allopurinol (from 100 mg/day to 1000 mg/day; more typically from 100 mg/day to 300 mg/day) febuxostat (from 40 mg/day to 120 mg/day; more specifically from 60 mg/day to 80 mg/day) and oxypurinol; Puricase / PEG-uricase (from 4 mg to 12 mg every two weeks by infusion); uricosuric agents such as sulfinpyrazone (from 100 mg/day to 800 mg/day), probenecid (500 mg/day), losartan (from 25 mg/day to 200 mg/day, more typically from 50 mg/day to 100 mg/day), fenofibrate, JTT-552 (a URAT-I inhibitor), benzbromarone (from 70mg/day to 150 mg/day), and statins such as atorvastatin (LIPITOR®). The other uric acid lowering drug can be administered in its usual amount or in an amount that is less than the usual amount, whether by administering lower doses of such other drug or by less frequent dosing with such other drug.
The compounds of Formula I and their pharmaceutically acceptable salts can be administered together with other drugs used to decrease the pain associated with gouty attacks, for example nonsteroidal antiinflammatory drugs (NSAIDs), colchicine, corticosteroids, and other analgesics.
In the course of lowering uric acid levels in the blood it is expected that the compounds of Formula I will increase the levels of uric acid in the urine. To increase the pH of the urine and thereby improve solubility of the uric acid, citrate or bicarbonate, for example, can be administered in conjunction with the compound of Formula I.
An admixture of the compound or salt of Formula I with one or more other uric acid lowering drugs, analgesics, and pH increasing agents, can be administered to the subject. Alternatively the compound or salt of Formula I and the one or more other uric acid lowering drugs, analgesics, and pH increasing agents are not mixed together to form an admixture but are administered independently to the subject. When the active ingredients are not mixed together to form a single admixture or composition it is convenient to provide them in the form of a kit comprising one or more unit oral doses of a Compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, one or more unit oral doses of one or more other uric acid lowering drugs, analgesics, and pH increasing agents, and instructions for administering the Compound of Formula I or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof in combination with the other active ingredients. Preferably the components of the kit are packaged together, such as in a box or a blister pack.
PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS
This invention provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and optionally a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. Further embodiments of the pharmaceutical composition of this invention comprise any one of the embodiments of the biologically active agents described above. In the interest of avoiding unnecessary redundancy, each such agent and group of agents is not being repeated, but they are incorporated into this description of pharmaceutical compositions as if they were repeated.
Preferably the composition is adapted for oral administration, e.g. in the form of a tablet, coated tablet, dragee, hard or soft gelatin capsule, solution, emulsion or suspension. In general the oral composition will comprise from 1 mg to 2500 mg, more preferably from 1 mg to 1200 mg, preferably from 400 mg to 1000 mg, more preferably from 600 mg to 800 mg, more preferably from 600 mg to 1000 mg, of the compound of Formula I or its salt. It is convenient for the subject to swallow one or two tablets, coated tablets, dragees, or gelatin capsules per day. However the composition can also be adapted for administration by any other conventional means of systemic administration including rectally, e.g. in the form of suppositories, parenterally, e.g. in the form of injection solutions, or nasally.
The active ingredients can be processed with pharmaceutically inert, inorganic or organic carriers for the production of pharmaceutical compositions. Lactose, corn starch or derivatives thereof, talc, stearic acid or its salts and the like can be used, for example, as such carriers for tablets, coated tablets, dragees and hard gelatin capsules. Suitable carriers for soft gelatin capsules are, for example, vegetable oils, waxes, fats, semi-solid and liquid polyols and the like. Depending on the nature of the active ingredient no carriers are, however, usually required in the case of soft gelatin capsules, other than the soft gelatin itself. Suitable carriers for the production of solutions and syrups are, for example, water, polyols, glycerol, vegetable oils and the like. Suitable carriers for suppositories are, for example, natural or hardened oils, waxes, fats, semi-liquid or liquid polyols and the like.
The pharmaceutical compositions can, moreover, contain preservatives, solubilizers, stabilizers, wetting agents, emulsifϊers, sweeteners, colorants, flavorants, salts for varying the osmotic pressure, buffers, coating agents or antioxidants.
The invention will be better understood by reference to the following examples, which illustrate but do not limit the invention described herein.
EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 1.
Five groups of 4 healthy, normal men and women received a single, oral administration of escalating doses of Compound BI (n = 3 per group) or placebo capsules (n = 1 per group) in a randomized, double blind clinical study. Blood uric acid levels were measured before and 24 hours after administration of study treatment. Compound BI was administered at doses of 50, 100, 200, 400 or 800 mg.
Administration of a single dose of Compound BI resulted in a significant, dose-dependent reduction in uric acid levels. Uric acid levels were elevated in subjects receiving placebo. (Table 1) Table 1.
Percent Change in Uric Acid Levels Following a Single Administration of Study Treatment
Study Treatment (N) Mean Percent Change
Placebo (5) + 8.4
BI 50 (3) - 8.8
BI 100 (3) -13.4
BI 200 (3) -18.9
BI 400 (3) -35.0
BI 800 (3) -32.7
EXAMPLE 2.
Two groups of 8 healthy normal men and women received oral administration of either 800 mg Compound BI once per day (n = 6 per group) or 400 mg Compound BI twice per day (n = 6 per group) or placebo capsules (n = 2 per group) in a randomized, double blind clinical study. Blood uric acid levels were measured before administration of study treatment, 24 hours after the first administration of study treatment and after 7 consecutive days of study treatment administration.
Administration of a single dose of Compound BI resulted in a significant reduction in uric acid levels in both groups of patients receiving Compound BI (Table 2), as did daily administration for 7 days (Table 3). Uric acid levels in patients receiving placebo capsules were elevated compared to baseline 24 hours after the first administration and unchanged after receiving placebo daily for 7 days. Table 2.
Percent Change in Uric Acid Levels Following a Single Administration of Study Treatment
Study Treatment (N) Mean Percent Change
Placebo (4) + 4.9
BI 400 bid. (6) - 54.0
BI 800 qd (6) - 45.3
Table 3.
Percent Change in Uric Acid Levels Following a Daily Administration of Study Treatment for Seven Days
Study Treatment (N) Mean Percent Change
Placebo (4) + 0.5
BI 400 bid. (6) - 56.7
BI 800 qd (6) - 53.2
EXAMPLE 3: Compound BI increases uric acid excretion in urine of mice treated with the uricase inhibitor potassium oxonate
The model to induce hyperuricemia involves the use of the uricase (urate oxidase) inhibitor potassium oxonate that causes a delay in the degradation of uric acid to allantoin. Humans have little or no uricase activity, so inhibition of this enzyme with postassium oxonate makes mouse uric acid processing more similar to that of humans. Male 11 -week old C57/B16 mice (Harlan, Frederick, MD) were used in the studies (8 per experimental group). Mice were recieving standard rodent chow that was removed one hour before administration of potassium oxonate. Mice were given an intraperitoneal injection (i.p.) of potassium oxonate (300 mg/kg) that was suspended in 0.5% hydroxypropylmethylcellulose (HPMC). After 90 minutes, mice received treatments by oral administration of allopurinol (20 mg/kg; Sigma, Saint Louis, MO), benzbromarone (30 or 100 mg/kg; Sigma) or Compound BI (100 mg/kg) or vehicle (1% HPMC) and urine collection was started. Urine collection was performed at 1 , 3 and 5 hours after drug treatments and uric acid was measured with a colorimetric assay (Bio Vision Research Products, Mountain View, California).
In urine collected between 3 and 5 hours after drug administration, Compound BI induced a significant increase in excreted uric acid versus the Oxonate control group. Benzbromarone at both doses also induced an increase in uric acid concentration in urine, though to lesser degree than Compound BI. Allopurinol, which inhibits uric acid synthesis in the liver and other tissues, reduced the concentration of uric acid in urine. (Table 4 and Figure 1).
Table 4
Figure imgf000062_0001
* = Greater than Oxonate group, P<.05
** = Greater than Oxonate, Benzbromarone or Allopurinol groups, P< .05
Remainder of this page intentionally left blank. EXAMPLE 4.
Plasma samples taken immediately prior to and at 1, 2, 4, 6, 12 and 24 hours after a single, oral administration of a test compound to 4 healthy, normal men and women in each of three groups as described above in Example 1 were analyzed to determine uric acid levels. Compound BI (n = 3 per group) or placebo capsules (n = 1 per group) were administered in a randomized, double blind clinical study. Plasma samples taken at the time points indicated from patients receiving Compound BI at doses of 200, 400 or 800 mg were stored at -700C and analyzed at a later time.
Administration of a single dose of Compound BI resulted in significant, dose-dependent reductions in uric acid levels in all three groups (Figure 2). Uric acid levels were elevated compared to baseline values throughout the 24-hour period in subjects receiving placebo. Uric acid levels in the subjects receiving placebo steadily increased from baseline through 12 hours and then declined to near-baseline levels at 24 hours, reflecting a daily rhythm in serum uric acid levels. In contrast, uric acid levels in all subjects receiving Compound BI declined to or near to the lowest levels for each group through the 6-hour time point. Uric acid levels of the group receiving the highest dose of Compound BI were nearly identical at the 6 and 12-hour time points, and declined further between 12 and 24 hours.
These results indicate that administration of Compound BI can reduce the levels of uric acid throughout a 24-hour period compared to placebo administration and that administration of the highest single dose of Compound BI, 800 mg, resulted in the lowest levels of uric acid throughout the 24-hour period.
EXAMPLE 5.
Sixteen men and women participating in a clinical study were randomly assigned to receive either placebo capsules (n = 4 subjects), 400 mg Compound BI twice per day (n = 6 subjects), or 800 mg Compound BI once per day (n = 6 subjects) for seven consecutive days. Plasma samples taken prior to (Time 0) and at 1, 2, 4, 9, 11, 13, 18 and 24 hours after the initial administration of the test article on Day 7 of the study were stored at -700C and later analyzed for uric acid. (This Example 5 is a continuation of the experiment described in Example 2.) Uric acid levels in both groups of subjects receiving Compound BI were significantly reduced at Time 0 on Day 7 compared to Time 0 on the first day of the study and compared to placebo values throughout either day. Uric acid levels in the groups treated with Compound BI remained significantly below placebo values throughout Day 7 (Figure 3).
Uric acid levels throughout Day 7 in the subjects receiving placebo capsules daily over the 7-day course of the study were virtually unaffected by the placebo and were quite comparable to placebo values observed during the first 24-hour period of the study described in Example 4 as can be seen by comparing Figure 3 with Figure 2. (Example 4/Figure 2 involved a different group of patients from Example 5/Figure 3.)
These results show that daily administration of Compound BI for seven days reduced patient exposure to uric acid to an even greater extent than observed with a single day of treatment.
EXAMPLE 6: URATl Inhibition Assay
URATl (Uric Acid Transporter 1) is expressed on the apical membrane in renal tubules. It mediates the re -uptake of uric acid from the urine into the blood. Inhibition of URATl leads to increased excretion of uric acid in the urine, and is therefore a potential mode of action for drugs that lower serum uric acid concentrations. Probenecid and Benzbromarone, for example, have been used clinically for treatment of gout and hyperuricemia, and they both act on URATl to reduce uric acid reuptake. However, benzbromarone was withdrawn from the market due to liver toxicity via mechanisms independent of URATl, and probenecid acts on numerous transporter proteins, resulting in interactions with a variety of other drugs.
An in vitro URATl assay is useful for identifying compounds with potential activity in lowering serum uric acid. A suitable assay involves transfection of cells (e.g. human embryonic kidney cells; "HEK") with a vector encoding human URATl, followed by determination of the ability of trans fected cells to take up radiolabeled uric acid. The activity of compounds as URATl inhibitors is evaluated by their ability to block uric acid uptake by transfected cells.
Test Compounds and Chemicals: Benzbromarone (Sigma, Cat.No.B5774), Probenecid (Sigma, Cat.No.P8761)), DMSO (Sigma, Cat.No.D-2650), [8-14C] Urate (50-60mCi/mmol; American Radio Chemicals, Cat. No. ARC0513).
Subcloning of hURAT 1 into the expression vector: Plasmid vector pCMV6-XL5 containing hURAT 1 cDNA (Cat. No. SC 125624) and the expression vector pCMV6-Neo (Cat. No.pCMVNEO) were obtained from OriGene Technologies, Inc. The full-length hURATl cDNA was obtained from the vector pCMV6-XL5 and subcloned into the expression vector pCMV6-Neo to create the hURATl expression plasmid pCMV6-hURATl . The sequences were verified by automatic DNA sequencing.
Cell Culture, transfection of URATl expressing plasmids and the establishment of stably expressing HEK cells for hURATl:
Human embryonic kidney 293 (HEK) cells (ATTCC, Cat No. CRL- 1573) were cultured in EMEM supplemented with 10% FBS and 2mM L-glutamine and incubated at 37° C and 5% CO2. For transfection experiments, cells were plated on 60 mm dishes in 1 ml media per dish. After an 18-24 hour incubation, cells were transfected with plasmid pCMV6-hURATl or the expression vector pCMV6-Neo, using the Lipofectin trasfection agent following the manufacturer's instructions (Invitrogen, Cat.No.18292). After transfection cells were grown in EMEM media for 72 hours and then by adding lmg/ml Geneticin (GIBCO, Cat. No 10131) stable transfectants were selected. Stable transfectants expressing hURATl (herein after referred as hURATl -HEK cells) or cells having only the expression vector pCMV6-Neo (herein after referred as mock-HEK cells) were verified using reverse transcription polymerase chain reaction (RT-PCR) methods.
[8-14C] Urate Uptake Assay: hURATl -HEK cells and mock-HEK cells were plated in poly-D-Lysine Cell culture 24 well plates (Becton Dickinson, Cat. No.354414) at a concentration of 3X105 in EMEM medium and incubated overnight. Reaction solutions containing the [8-14C] urate (55 mCi/mmol) at a final concentration of 50 μM were prepared with or without test compounds in Hanks' balanced salt solution (HBSS) containing 125 mM sodium gluconate, 4.8 mM potassium gluconate, 1.3 mM calcium, 5.6 mM glucose, 1.2 mM magnesium sulfate, 1.2 mM KH2PO4 and 25 mM HEPES (pH7.4). Before the uptake assay started, the culture medium was removed and the cells were incubated for 5 min in 0.6 ml of HBSS. After that HBSS was removed, the prepared reaction solutions were added into each well and incubated for 5 min at room temperature. Then the reaction solution was removed, cells were washed twice with 0.6 ml of cold HBSS and lysed with 0.2 ml of 0.1 M NaOH for 20 min. The cell lysates were transferred into the scintillation vials containing 1 ml of scintillation fluid (Opti Phase SuperMIX, PerkinElmer, Cat No. 1200-439) and the radioactivity was counted in the Microbeta counter (1450, Wallac Jet, PerkinElmer). Test compounds were dissolved in DMSO and the same concentration of DMSO was added into the wells of mock-HEK cells and the hURATl-HEK cells that didn't contain test compounds. For each test compound, the uptake assay was performed 2 times and carried out in triplicate. Urate uptake of the cells for each test condition was presented as the average percent inhibition in comparison to the DMSO control. The radioactivity values obtained for the wells that contained DMSO were taken as 100% uptake of the cells. The observed concentration - percent inhibition data were fitted to a sigmoidal concentration-effect model, where:
IC50ΛSlope = [(100 * ConcΛSlope) / % Inhibition] - ConcΛSlope
IC50 and slope estimates with their 95% confidence limits were determined by a non- linear, least-squares regression analysis using the Data Analysis Toolbox™ (MDL Information Systems, San Leandro, CA, USA).
For assessment of activity of compounds as URATl inhibitors, the percent inhibition of uric acid uptake was typically assessed at a drug concentration of 10 micromolar (Table 5). Additional drug concentrations were tested for determination of IC-50 values for some compounds (Table 6). Table 5. Inhibitory effects of the test compounds at a concentration of at 10 μm on 14Curate uptake in hURATl-HEK cells Test
Compound % of Inhibition S.D.
AB 3.7 3.29
AF 41.30 7.97
AG 5.99 4.39
AH 26.78 2.97
AI 2.3 0.25
AM 0.0 0.0
AN 54.44 3.47
AT 7.95 2.60
AW 61.93 1.61
AY 8.9 2.14
BH 62.40 5.47
BI 86.07 0.46
BJ 81.76 1.41
BM 22.21 2.20
BP 76.50 4.63
BS 28.60 6.38
BT 51.80 2.55
CF 96.50 1.13
EB 21.57 0.48
CD 63.5 0.44
CQ 84.84 0.36
DP 60.51 1.24
CK 88.00 0.84
CM 88.96 1.18
CR 60.60 3.70
DR 68.30 0.47
DS 75.00 1.00
DT 89.12 0.48
DU 30.52 2.10
DN 45.38 0.79
DV 79.55 0.79
DO 80.30 0.29
DQ 99.40 1.01
EA 49.00 1.36
DW 54.00 4.34
DX 64.00 1.79
DY 85.20 1.73
DZ 26.90 6.22
EC 89.12 0.48
ED 79.55 0.79
EE 90.1 0.22
EF 90.35 0.09
EG 89.68 0.35
EH 95.86 0.11
EI 93 0.17 Table 6:
Figure imgf000068_0001
EXAMPLE 7:
Figure imgf000069_0001
2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-methoxyphenyl)acetic acid
Step A: Preparation of Ethyl 2-(3-hydroxy-4-methoxyphenyl)acetate:
The stirred solution of 2-(3-Hydroxy-4-methoxyphenyl)acetic acid (9.82 g, 53.90 mmol) and p-Toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (1.15 g, 6.0 mmol) in abs ethanol (100 ml) was refluxed for 4 hours or until all the starting material is consumed. The reaction mixture was concentrated, diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with IM HCl. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated, and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hex: ethyl acetate 2:1) to give the title compound.
1H NMR (270 MHz, CDCl3): 1.2 (t, 3H); 3.6 (s, 2H); 3.8 (s, 3H); 4.1 (q, 2H); 6.6-6.8 (m, 3H).
Step B: Preparation of Ethyl 2-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-methoxyphenyl)acetate:
A solution of 2,6-Dimethylbenzyl alcohol (3.23 g, 23.7 mmol) and diisopropyl azodicarboxylate (DIAD, 5.23 g, 25.9 mmol) in THF (20 ml) was added drop wise to a solution of Ethyl 2-(3-Hydroxy-4-methoxyphenyl)acetate (Step A, 5.48 g, 26.12 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (6.79g, 25.9 mmol) in THF (100 ml) at O0C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 hours, diluted with ether and washed with water and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated, and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hex: ethyl acetate 4:1) to give the title compound. 1H NMR (270 MHz, CDCl3): 1.2 (t, 3H); 2.3 (s, 6H); 3.5 (s, 2H); 3.8 (s, 3H); 4.1 (q, 2H); 5.1 (s, 2H); 6.9 (m, 2H); 7.15-7.35 (m, 4H).
Step C: Preparation of 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-methoxyphenyl)acetic acid:
To a stirred solution of Ethyl 2-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-methoxyphenyl)acetate (Step B, 7.86 g, 24 mmol) in absolute ethanol (120 ml) was added IN NaOH (50 ml) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred for 3 hours, or until all the starting material is gone, concentrated and diluted with chloroform and acidified by IM HCl to bring the pH to 3.5-4. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (chloroform: methanol 95:5 spiked with acetic acid) to give the title compound as a white solid.
1H NMR (270 MHz, CDCl3): 2.3 (s, 6H); 3.5 (s, 2H); 3.8 (s, 3H); 5.1 (s, 2H); 6.9 (m, 2H); 7.15-7.35 (m, 4H).
EXAMPLE 8:
Figure imgf000070_0001
Methyl 3-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-3-oxopropanoate
Step A: Preparation of Methyl 3-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-3-oxopropanoate:
To a solution of 3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)acetophenone (10.40 g, 43.3 mmol) and dimethyl carbonate (64 ml) in DMF (100 ml) was added NaH (60% oil dispersion, 2.38 g, 99 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours, quenched with aqueous HCl and extracted with diethyl ether (2 X). The combined organic layers were washed with water, brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography eluted with hexane: ethyl acetate (2:1) to give the title compound.
1H NMR (270 MHz, CDCl3): 2.4 (s, 6H); 3.8 (s, 3H); 4.0 (s, 2H); 5.1 (s, 2H); 7.1 (dd, 2H); 7.2 (m, 2H); 7.4 (t, IH); 7.5-7.6 (m, 2H).
EXAMPLE 9:
Figure imgf000071_0001
5-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-5-oxopentanoic acid
Step A: Preparation of Ethyl 3-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-3-oxopropanoate:
To a solution of 3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)acetophenone (5.20 g, 21.6 mmol) and diethyl carbonate (43.49 g, 368 mmol) in DMF (50 ml) was added NaH (60% oil dispersion, 1.61 g, 40.2 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours, quenched with aqueous HCl and extracted with diethyl ether (2 X). The combined organic layers were washed with water, brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography eluted with hexane: ethyl acetate (4: 1) to give the title compound.
1H NMR (270 MHz, CDCl3): 1.3 (t, 3H); 2.4 (s, 6H); 4.0 (s, 2H); 4.1 (q, 2H); 5.1 (s, 2H); 7.1 (dd, 2H); 7.2 (m, 2H); 7.4 (t, IH); 7.5-7.6 (m, 2H).
Step B: Preparation of Diethyl 2-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)benzoyl)pentanedioate: To a solution of Ethyl 3-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-3-oxopropanoate (Step A, 5 g, 16.02 mmol) in t-butyl alcohol (50 ml) was added a solution of potassium tert-butoxide (IM in t-butyl alcohol, 1.988 g, 17.7 mmol) and the reaction mixture was stirred for 30 minutes at room temperature. Ethyl 3-bromopropionate was added drop wise to the reaction mixture and stirring continued for another 2 hours and then poured into IM HCl, extracted with ethyl acetate (2X), washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography eluted with hexane: ethyl acetate (2:1) to give the title compound.
Step C: Preparation of 5-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-5-oxopentanoic acid
To a solution of Diethyl 2-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)benzoyl)pentanedioate (Step B, 1.66 g, 4.0 mmol) in methanol (50 ml) was added IN NaOH (17 ml) at the room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred for 14 hours or until all the starting material is gone, concentrated, diluted in chloroform, and washed with IM HCl to bring the pH to 3.5 to 4. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography eluted with chloroform: methanol (95:5 spiked with acetic acid) to give the title compound.
1H NMR (270 MHz, CDCl3): 2.1 (m, 2H); 2.4 (s, 6H); 2.5 (t, 2H); 3.1 (t, 2H); 5.1 (s, 2H); 7.1 (dd, 2H); 7.2 (m, 2H); 7.4 (t, IH); 7.5-7.6 (m, 2H).
EXAMPLE 10:
Figure imgf000072_0001
2-(3-(2,6-Difluorobenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid
Step A: Preparation of Ethyl 2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)acetate: The stirred solution of 2-(3-Hydroxyphenyl)acetic acid (25 g, 164.3 mmol) and p- Toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (3.49 g, 18.3 mmol) in abs ethanol (250 ml) was refluxed for 4 hours or until all the starting material is consumed. The reaction mixture was concentrated, diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with IM HCl. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated, and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hex: ethyl acetate 4:1) to give the title compound.
1H NMR (270 MHz, CDCl3): 1.2 (t, 3H); 3.6 (s, 2H); 4.1 (q, 2H); 6.6-6.8 (m, 3H).
Step B: Preparation of Ethyl 2-(3-(2,6-difluorobenzyloxy)phenyl)acetate:
To a stirred solution of Ethyl 2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)acetate (4 g, 22.2 mmol) in DMF (20 ml) was added potassium carbonate (4 g, 28.9 mmol) at room temperature followed by drop wise addition of 2,6-Difluorobenzyl bromide (5.06 g, 24.4 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred for 12 hours and taken in ethyl acetate, washed with water (2X), brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hex: ethyl acetate 4:1) to give the title compound.
1H NMR (270 MHz, CDCl3): 1.2 (t, 3H); 3.6 (s, 2H); 4.1 (q, 2H); 5.1 (s, 2H); 6.9 (m, 5H); 7.2-7.35 (m, 2H).
Step C: Preparation of 2-(3-(2,6-Difluorobenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid:
To a stirred solution Ethyl 2-(3-(2,6-difluorobenzyloxy)phenyl)acetate (Step B, 7.86 g, 24 mmol) in absolute ethanol (120 ml) was added IN NaOH (50 ml) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred for 3 hours, or until all the starting material is gone, concentrated and diluted with chloroform and washed with IM HCl to bring the pH to 3.5-4. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (chloroform: methanol, 95:5 spiked with acetic acid) to give the title compound as white solid.
1H NMR (270 MHz, CDCl3): 3.6 (s, 2H); 5.1 (s, 2H); 6.9 (m, 5H); 7.2-7.35 (m, 2H). EXAMPLE 11 :
Figure imgf000074_0001
4-(3-(2,6-Dichlorobenzyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid
Step A: Preparation of 4-(2,6-Dichlorobenzyloxy)acetophenone:
A solution of 2,6-Dichlorolbenzyl alcohol (15 g, 84.7 mmol) and diisopropyl azodicarboxylate (DIAD, 18.66 g, 92.2 mmol) in THF (50 ml) was added drop wise to a solution of 3 -Hydroxy acetophenone (11.53 g, 84.7 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (24.22 g, 92.3 mmol) in THF (200 ml) at O0C. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 hours, diluted with ether and washed with water, IN NaOH and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated, and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hex: ethyl acetate 4: 1) to give the title compound.
1H NMR (270 MHz, CDCl3): 2.5 (s, 3H); 5.3 (s, 2H); 7.2-7.3 (m, 2H); 7.4 (m, 3H); 7.6 (m, 2H).
Step B: Preparation of Ethyl 4-(3-(2,6-Dichlorobenzyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoate:
To a stirred solution of 4-(2,6-Dichlorobenzyloxy)acetophenone (Step A, 12 g, 40.6 mmol) in dry THF (100 ml) and DMPU (30 ml) was added a solution of lithium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide (IM in THF, 47.21 ml) at -650C under argon. After 10 minutes of stirring at -650C, ethyl bromoacetate (10.18 g, 61 mmol) was added rapidly. The reaction mixture was stirred for an additional 10 minutes and then warmed to room temperature for 4 hours. The crude mixture was taken in ethyl acetate and washed with water and brine. The aqueous layer was extracted one more time with ethyl acetate. The combined organic layers were dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (ethyl acetate: hexane, 1 :4) to provide the title compound.
1H NMR (270 MHz, CDCl3): 1.2 (t, 3H); 2.8 (t, 2H); 3.3 (t, 2H); 4.4 (q, 2H); 5.3 (s, 2H); 7.2-7.3 (m, 2H); 7.4 (m, 3H); 7.6 (m, 2H).
Step C: Preparation of 4-(3-(2,6-Dichlorobenzyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid:
A solution of Ethyl 4-(3-(2,6-Dichlorobenzyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoate (Step B, 14.86 g, 39 mmol) in abs ethanol (100 ml) was treated with IN NaOH (60 ml) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred for 3 hours, or until all the starting material is gone, concentrated and diluted with chloroform and washed with IM HCl to bring the pH to 3.5-4. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (chloroform: methanol, 95:5 spiked with acetic acid) to give the title compound as white solid.
1H NMR (270 MHz, CDCl3): 2.8 (t, 2H); 3.3 (t, 2H); 5.3 (s, 2H); 7.2-7.3 (m, 2H); 7.4 (m, 3H); 7.6 (m, 2H).
EXAMPLE 12:
Figure imgf000075_0001
2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)propanoic acid
Step A: Preparation of Ethyl 2-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetate: A solution of 2,6-Dimethylbenzyl alcohol (5.25 g, 38.6 mmol) and diisopropyl azodicarboxylate (DIAD, 8.49 g, 42 mmol) in THF (30 ml) was added drop wise to a solution of Ethyl 3-hydroxyphenylacetate (6.66 g, 37 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (1 Ig, 42 mmol) in THF (100 ml). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 hours, diluted with ether and washed with water and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated, and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hex: ethyl acetate 4:1) to give the title compound.
1H NMR (270 MHz, CDCl3): 1.2 (t, 3H); 2.3 (s, 6H); 3.5 (s, 2H); 4.1 (q, 2H); 5.1 (s, 2H); 6.9 (m, 2H); 7.15-7.35 (m, 5H).
Step B: Preparation of Ethyl 4-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)propanoate:
To a stirred solution of Ethyl 2-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetate (Step A, 6.35 g, 21.3 mmol) in dry THF (100 ml) was added a solution of lithium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide (1.0 M in THF, 31.91 ml) at -650C under argon. After 10 minutes of stirring at -650C, iodomethane (15.12 g, 106.5 mmol) was added rapidly. The reaction mixture was warmed to room temperature for 6 hours. The crude mixture was taken in ethyl acetate and washed with water (2X). The aqueous layer was extracted one more time with ethyl acetate. The combined organic layers were washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (ether: hexane, 1 :5) to provide the title compound.
1H NMR (270 MHz, CDCl3): 1.2 (t, 3H); 1.5 (m, 3H); 2.4 (s, 6H); 3.7 (m, IH); 4.1 (q, 2H); 5.1 (s, 2H); 6.9 (m, 2H); 7.15-7.35 (m, 5H).
Step C: Preparation of 4-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)propanoic acid:
A solution of Ethyl 4-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)propanoate (Step B, 1.30 g, 4.2 mmol) in abs ethanol (30 ml) was treated with IN NaOH (10 ml) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred for 3 hours, or until all the starting material is gone, concentrated and diluted with chloroform and acidified by IM HCl to bring the pH to 3.5- 4. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (chloroform: methanol, 95:5 spiked with acetic acid) to give the title compound as white solid.
1H NMR (270 MHz, CDCl3): 1.5 (m, 3H); 2.4 (s, 6H); 3.7 (m, IH); 5.1 (s, 2H); 6.9 (m, 2H); 7.15-7.35 (m, 5H).
EXAMPLE 13:
Figure imgf000077_0001
2-(3 -(4-(Trifluoromethyl)benzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid
Step A: Preparation of Ethyl 2-(3-(4-(trifluoromethyl)benzyloxy)phenyl)acetate:
To a stirred solution of Ethyl 2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)acetate (7.3 g, 30.5 mmol) in DMF (20 ml) was added potassium carbonate (5.47 g, 39.6 mmol) at room temperature followed by drop wise addition of 4-Trifluoromethylbenzyl bromide (6.04 g, 33.6 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred for 12 hours and taken in ethyl acetate, washed with water (2X), brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hex: ether 5:1) to give the title compound.
1H NMR (270 MHz, CDCl3): 1.2 (t, 3H); 3.7 (s, 2H); 4.1 (q, 2H); 5.1 (s, 2H); 6.9 (m, 3H); 7.2 (t, IH); 7.5-7.7 (m, 4H).
Step B: Preparation of 2-(3-(4-(Trifluoromethyl)benzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid:
To a stirred solution Ethyl 2-(3-(4-(trifluoromethyl)benzyloxy)phenyl)acetate (Step A, 6 g, 17.7 mmol) in absolute ethanol (70 ml) was added IN NaOH (36 ml) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred for 3 hours, or until all the starting material is gone, concentrated and diluted with chloroform and acidified by IM HCl to bring the pH to 3.5-4. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (chloroform: methanol, 95:5 spiked with acetic acid) to give the title compound as white solid.
1H NMR (270 MHz, CDCl3): 3.7 (s, 2H); 5.1 (s, 2H); 6.9 (m, 3H); 7.2 (t, IH); 7.5-7.7 (m, 4H).
EXAMPLE 14:
Figure imgf000078_0001
2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)butanoic acid
Step A: Preparation of Ethyl 2-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetate:
A solution of 2,6-Dimethylbenzyl alcohol (5.25 g, 38.6 mmol) and diisopropyl azodicarboxylate (DIAD, 8.49 g, 42 mmol) in THF (30 ml) was added drop wise to a solution of Ethyl 3-hydroxyphenylacetate (6.66 g, 37 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (1 Ig, 42 mmol) in THF (100 ml). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 hours, diluted with ether and washed with water and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated, and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hex: ethyl acetate 4:1) to give the title compound.
1H NMR (270 MHz, CDCl3): 1.2 (t, 3H); 2.3 (s, 6H); 3.5 (s, 2H); 4.1 (q, 2H); 5.1 (s, 2H); 6.9 (m, 2H); 7.15-7.35 (m, 5H).
Step B: Preparation of Ethyl 4-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)butanoate:
To a stirred solution of Ethyl 2-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetate (Step A, 4.79 g, 16.0 mmol) in dry THF (60 ml) was added drop wise a solution of lithium diisopropylamide (1.0 M in THF, 25 ml) at -780C under argon followed by addition of hexamethylphosphoramide (HMPA, 15 ml). After 15 minutes of stirring at -780C, Iodoethane (12.53 g, 80.3 mmol) was added rapidly. The reaction mixture was warmed to room temperature for 16 hours. The crude mixture was quenched with sat. NH4Cl and extracted with ether (2X). The combined organic layers were washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (ethyl acetate: hexane, 1 :4) to provide the title compound.
1H NMR (270 MHz, CDCl3): 1.0 (t, 3H); 1.2 (m, 3H); 1.8 (m, IH); 2.1 (m, IH); 2.4 (s, 6H); 3.4 (m, IH); 4.1 (q, 2H); 5.1 (s, 2H); 6.9 (m, 2H); 7.15-7.35 (m, 5H).
Step C: Preparation of 4-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)butanoic acid:
A solution of Ethyl 4-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)butanoate (Step B, 3.26 g, 10 mmol) in abs ethanol (60 ml) was treated with IN NaOH (20 ml) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred for 3 hours, or until all the starting material is gone, concentrated and diluted with chloroform and acidified by IM HCl to bring the pH to 3.5- 4. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (chloroform: methanol, 95:5 spiked with acetic acid) to give the title compound as white solid.
1H NMR (270 MHz, CDCl3): 1.0 (t, 3H); 1.8 (m, IH); 2.1 (m, IH); 2.4 (s, 6H); 3.4 (m, IH); 5.1 (s, 2H); 6.9 (m, 2H); 7.15-7.35 (m, 5H).
EXAMPLE 15:
Figure imgf000079_0001
2-(3-(3,5-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid
Step A: Preparation of Ethyl 2-(3-(3,5-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetate: To a stirred solution of Ethyl 2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)acetate (3 g, 16.6 mmol) in DMF (20 ml) was added potassium carbonate (2.99 g, 21.6 mmol) at room temperature followed by drop wise addition of 3,5-Dimethylbenzyl bromide (3.30 g, 16.6 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred for 16 hours and taken in ethyl acetate, washed with water (2X), brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hex: ethyl acetate 4:1) to give the title compound.
Step B: Preparation of 2-(3-(3,5-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid:
To a stirred solution Ethyl 2-(3-(3,5-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetate (Step A, 2.38 g, 8.0 mmol) in absolute ethanol (40 ml) was added IN NaOH (16 ml) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred for 3 hours, or until all the starting material is gone, concentrated and diluted with chloroform and acidified by IM HCl to bring the pH to 3.5- 4. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (chloroform: methanol, 95:5 spiked with acetic acid) to give the title compound as white solid.
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): 2.4 (s, 6H); 3.7 (s, 2H); 5.1 (s, 2H); 6.9 (m, 3H); 7.2 (s, IH); 7.25-7.35 (m, 3H).
EXAMPLE 16:
Figure imgf000080_0001
2-(3-(2,4-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid
Step A: Preparation of Ethyl 2-(3-(2,4-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetate:
To a stirred solution of Ethyl 2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)acetate (3 g, 16.6 mmol) in DMF (20 ml) was added potassium carbonate (2.99 g, 21.6 mmol) at room temperature followed by drop wise addition of 2,4-Dimethylbenzyl chloride (3.11 g, 18.3 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred for 16 hours and taken in ethyl acetate, washed with water (2X), brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hex: ethyl acetate 4:1) to give the title compound.
Step B: Preparation of 2-(3-(2,4-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid:
To a stirred solution Ethyl 2-(3-(2,4-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetate (Step A, .900 g, 3.0 mmol) in absolute ethanol (25 ml) was added IN NaOH (10 ml) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred for 3 hours, or until all the starting material is gone, concentrated and diluted with chloroform and acidified by IM HCl to bring the pH to 3.5- 4. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (chloroform: methanol, 95:5 spiked with acetic acid) to give the title compound as white solid.
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): 2.4 (s, 6H); 3.6 (s, 2H); 5.1 (s, 2H); 6.9 (m, 3H); 7.25-7.35 (m, 4H).
EXAMPLE 17:
Figure imgf000081_0001
2-(3-(2,6-Dimethoxybenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid
Step A: Preparation of Ethyl 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethoxybenzyloxy)phenyl)acetate:
A solution of 2,6-Dimethoxylbenzyl alcohol (3.33 g, 19.8 mmol) and diisopropyl azodicarboxylate (DIAD, 4.36 g, 21.6 mmol) in THF (30 ml) was added drop wise to a solution of Ethyl 2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)acetate (4 g, 22.2 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (5.66g, 21.6 mmol) in THF (80 ml). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 8 hours, diluted with ether and washed with water and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated, and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hex: ethyl acetate 4:1) to give the title compound. Step B: Preparation of 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethoxybenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid:
To a stirred solution Ethyl 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethoxybenzyloxy)phenyl)acetate (Step A, 6 g, 18.2 mmol) in absolute ethanol (100 ml) was added IN NaOH (40 ml) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred for 3 hours, or until all the starting material is gone, concentrated and diluted with chloroform and acidified by IM HCl to bring the pH to 3.5-4. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (chloroform: methanol, 95:5 spiked with acetic acid) to give the title compound as white solid.
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): 3.7 (s, 2H); 3.8 (s, 6H); 5.1 (s, 2H); 6.5 (d, 2H); 6.8-7.1 (m, 3H); 7.2 (d, IH); 7.3 (t, IH).
EXAMPLE 18:
Figure imgf000082_0001
2-(3-(Benzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid
Step A: Preparation of Ethyl 2-(3-(benzyloxy)phenyl)acetate:
To a stirred solution of Ethyl 2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)acetate (3 g, 16.6 mmol) in DMF (25 ml) was added potassium carbonate (2.99 g, 21.6 mmol) at room temperature followed by drop wise addition of benzyl bromide (3.13 g, 18.3 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred for 16 hours and taken in ethyl acetate, washed with water (2X) and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hex: ethyl acetate 4: 1) to give the title compound. Step B: Preparation of 2-(3-(Benzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid:
To a stirred solution Ethyl 2-(3-(benzyloxy)phenyl)acetate (Step A, 5.00 g, 18.5 mmol) in absolute ethanol (100 ml) was added IN NaOH (40 ml) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred for 3 hours, or until all the starting material is gone, concentrated and diluted with chloroform and acidified by IM HCl to bring the pH to 3.5- 4. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (chloroform: methanol, 95:5 spiked with acetic acid) to give the title compound as white solid.
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): 3.6 (s, 2H); 5.1 (s, 2H); 6.8 (m, 2H); 7.1 (s, IH), 7.2 (t, IH), 7.35-7.45 (m, 5H).
EXAMPLE 19:
Figure imgf000083_0001
2-(2-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid
Step A: Preparation of Ethyl 2-(2-hydroxyphenyl)acetate:
The stirred solution of 2-(2-Hydroxyphenyl)acetic acid (10 g, 65.7 mmol) and p- Toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (1.40 g, 7.3 mmol) in abs ethanol (100 ml) was refluxed for 4 hours or until all the starting material is consumed. The reaction mixture was concentrated, diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with IM HCl and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated, and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hex: ethyl acetate 2:1) to give the title compound. Step B: Preparation of Ethyl 2-(2-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetate:
A solution of 2,6-Dimethylbenzyl alcohol (2.72 g, 19.9 mmol) and diisopropyl azodicarboxylate (DIAD, 3.67 g, 18.2 mmol) in THF (30 ml) was added drop wise to a solution of Ethyl 2-(2-hydroxyphenyl)acetate (3 g, 16.6 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (4.76g, 18.2 mmol) in THF (80 ml). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 6 hours, diluted with ether and washed with water and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated, and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hex: ethyl acetate 4:1) to give the title compound.
Step C: Preparation of 2-(2-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid:
To a stirred solution Ethyl 2-(2-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetate (Step B, 4.70 g, 15.7 mmol) in absolute ethanol (75 ml) was added IN NaOH (35 ml) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred for 3 hours, or until all the starting material is gone, concentrated and diluted with chloroform and acidified by IM HCl to bring the pH to 3.5-4. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (chloroform: methanol, 95:5 spiked with acetic acid) to give the title compound as white solid.
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): 2.35 (s, 6H); 3.6 (s, 2H); 5.1 (s, 2H); 7.0 (t, IH); 7.1 (s, IH), 7.2-7.25 (m, 2H), 7.30-7.35 (m, 2H); 7.4 (t, IH).
EXAMPLE 20
Figure imgf000084_0001
2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)propanoic acid Step A: Preparation of Ethyl 2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)acetate:
A solution of 2-(3-Hydroxyphenyl)acetic acid (25g, 164.3 lmmol) and p-Toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (3.49g, 18.3mmol) in abs ethanol (250ml) was refluxed for 4 hours or until all the starting material is consumed. The reaction mixture was concentrated, diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with water. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated, and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hex: ethyl acetate, 2:1) to give the title compound.
1H NMR (270 MHz, CDCl3): 1.2 (t, 3H); 3.5 (s, 2H); 4.1 (q, 2H); 6.6-7.2 (m, 4H).
Step B: Preparation of Ethyl 2-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetate:
A solution of 2,6-Dimethylbenzyl alcohol (5.25g, 38.6mmol) and diisopropyl azodicarboxylate (DIAD, 8.49g, 42mmol) in THF (30ml) and DMF (13ml) was added drop wise to a solution of Ethyl 2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)acetate (Step A, 6.66g, 37mmol) and triphenylphosphine (TPP, 1 Ig, 42mmol) in THF (100 ml). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 hours, diluted with ether and washed with water. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated, and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hex: ethyl acetate, 4:1) to give the title compound.
1H NMR (270 MHz, CDCl3): 1.2 (t, 3H); 2.4 (s, 6H); 3.5 (s, 2H); 4.1 (q, 2H); 5.1 (s, 2H); 6.9 (m, 2H); 7.15-7.35 (m, 5H).
Step C: Preparation of Ethyl 2-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)propanoate:
To a stirred solution of Ethyl 2-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetate (Step B, 4g, 13.6mmol) in dry THF (30ml) at -680C under a dry argon atmosphere was added
LiHMDS drop wise (1 M solution in THF, 17.45ml, 17.4mmol), and the resulting orange solution was stirred at low temperature for 30 minutes before CH3I (5.71g, 40.26mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was slowly warmed to room temperature and stirred for another 15 hours. The reaction was quenched with ice, and the product was extracted with EtOAc (2X), the organic layer was washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hex: ether, 5:1) to give the title compound.
1H NMR (270 MHz, CDCl3): 1.2 (t, 3H); 1.5 (t, 3H); 2.4 (s, 6H); 3.7 (m, IH); 4.1 (q, 2H); 5.0 (s, 2H); 6.9 (m, 2H); 7.15-7.35 (m, 5H).
Step D: Preparation of 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)propanoic acid:
To a stirred solution of Ethyl 2-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)propanoate (Step C, 3g, 9.6mmol) in absolute ethanol (60ml) was added IN NaOH (20ml) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred for 3 hours, acidified to pH 3.5-4.0 by adding IN HCl and concentrated. The residue was taken into chloroform and washed with .1N HCl, brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (chloroform: methanol, 95:5 spiked with acetic acid) to give the title compound.
1H NMR (270 MHz, CDCl3): 1.5 (t, 3H); 2.4 (s, 6H); 3.7 (m, IH); 5.0 (s, 2H); 6.9 (m, 2H); 7.15-7.35 (m, 5H).
EXAMPLE 21
Figure imgf000086_0001
2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)butanoic acid
Step A: Preparation of Ethyl 2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)acetate:
Using the method of Example 20, Step A, the title compound was obtained.
1H NMR (270 MHz, CDCl3): 1.2 (t, 3H); 3.5 (s, 2H); 4.1 (q, 2H); 6.6-7.2 (m, 4H). Step B: Preparation of Ethyl 2-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetate:
Using the method of Example 20, Step B, the title compound was obtained.
1H NMR (270 MHz, CDCl3): 1.2 (t, 3H); 2.4 (s, 6H); 3.5 (s, 2H); 4.1 (q, 2H); 5.1 (s, 2H); 6.9 (m, 2H); 7.15-7.35 (m, 5H).
Step C: Preparation of Ethyl 2-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)butanoate:
To a stirred solution of Ethyl 2-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetate (Step B, 4.84g, 16.2mmol) in dry THF (60ml) and HMPA (15ml) at -780C under dry argon atmosphere was added LDA drop wise (2 M solution in THF, 25ml, 48.72mmol), and the resulting orange solution was stirred at low temperature for 30 minutes before C2H5I (10.13g, 64.96mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was slowly warmed to room temperature and stirred for another 15 hours. The reaction was quenched with aqueous citric acid, and the product was extracted with EtOAc (2X), the organic phase was washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hex: ethyl acetate, 4:1) to give the title compound.
1H NMR (270 MHz, CDCl3): .9 (t, 3H); 1.2 (t, 3H); 1.8 (m, IH); 2.1(m, IH); 2.4 (s, 6H); 3.4 (t, IH); 4.1 (q, 2H); 5.0 (s, 2H); 6.9 (m, 2H); 7.15-7.30 (m, 5H).
Step D: Preparation of 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)butanoic acid:
To a stirred solution of Ethyl 2-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)butanoate (Step C, 3.26g, lO.Ommol) in absolute ethanol (60ml) was added IN NaOH (20ml) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred for 3 hours, acidified to pH 3.5-4.0 by adding IN HCl, and concentrated. The residue was taken into chloroform and washed with . IN HCl, brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (chloroform: methanol, 95:5 spiked with acetic acid) to give the title compound. 1H NMR (270 MHz, CDCl3): .9 (t, 3H); 1.8 (m, IH); 2.1(m, IH); 2.4 (s, 6H); 3.4 (t, IH); 5.0 (s, 2H); 6.9 (m, 2H); 7.15-7.30 (m, 5H).
EXAMPLE 22
Figure imgf000088_0001
2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-2-methylpropanoic acid
Step A: Preparation of 2-(3-methoxyphenyl)-2-methylpropanenitrile:
To a stirred solution of 2-(3-methoxyphenyl)acetonitrile (6.2g, 42.1mmol), 40% aq tetrabutylammonium hydroxide (5.1g, 7.8mmol) and 50% aq NaOH (3Og, 375mmol) in toluene (30ml) was added CH3I (8ml, 129mmol) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred for 16 hours, CH3I (4ml) was further added and the reaction mixture was stirred for another 5 hours at room temperature. The reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc and washed with water and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated, and purified by flash chromatography on a short silica gel column (hex: methylene chloride, 2:1) to give the title compound.
1H NMR (400 MHz, d-DMSO): 1.74 (s, 6H); 3.8 (s, 3H); 6.9-7.04 (m, 2H); 7.11 (t, IH); 7.29-7.31 (m, IH).
Step B : Preparation of 2-(3 -hydroxyphenyl)-2-methylpropanenitrile :
To a stirred solution of 2-(3-methoxyphenyl)-2-methylpropanenitrile (Step A, 4.5g, 25.7mmol) in methylene chloride (30ml) was added BBr3 (IM in CH2Cl2, 50ml) at -780C under argon, the cold bath was substituted by ice bath after 30 minutes and the reaction was stirred at the same temperature for 2 hours and then 30 minutes at room temperature. The reaction mixture was quenched by addition of ice and worked up by washing with water and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated, and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (methylene chloride: ethyl acetate, 5:1) to give the title compound.
Step C: Preparation of 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-2-methylpropanenitrile:
A solution of 2,6-Dimethylbenzyl alcohol (2.76g, 20.3mmol) and diisopropyl azodicarboxylate (DIAD, 4.7g, 23.2mmol) in THF (20ml) was added drop wise to a solution of 2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)-2-methylpropanenitrile (Step B, 3.2g, 19.8mmol) and triphenylphosphine (5.28g, 20.1mmol) in THF (50ml) at O0C under argon. The reaction mixture was stirred at the same temperature for 16 hours, diluted with ether and washed with water. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated, and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hex: ethyl acetate, 9:1) to give the title compound.
Step D: Preparation of 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-2-methylpropanal:
To a stirred solution of 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-2-methylpropanenitrile (Step C, 3.5g, 12.5mmol) in dry methylene chloride (40ml) at -780C under dry argon atmosphere was added DIBAL-H drop wise (I M solution in CH2Cl2, 40ml), and the reaction mixture was stirred at the same temperature for 2 hours or until the reaction is complete as indicated by TLC. The reaction mixture was slowly quenched with ice cold water and the product was extracted with CH2Cl2 (2X), the organic phase was washed with IM HCl, brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hex: ether, 9: 1) to give the title compound.
Step E: Preparation of 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-2-methylpropanoic acid:
To a stirred solution of 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-2-methylpropanal (Step D, 1.9g, 6.7mmol) in acetone (40ml) was added drop wise jones reagent (10ml) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred for 3 hours, and was taken in EtOAc and washed with water, brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (chloroform: methanol, 95:5 spiked with acetic acid) to give the title compound. 1H NMR (400 MHz, d-DMSO): 1.46 (s, 6H); 2.33 (s, 6H); 5.0 (s, 2H); 6.92-6.98 (m, 3H); 7.07 (d, 2H); 7.15-7.18 (t, IH); 7.27-7.30 (t, IH).
EXAMPLE 23
Figure imgf000090_0001
1 -(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)cyclopropanecarboxylic acid
Step A : Preparation of 1 -(3 -methoxypheny^cyclopropanecarbonitrile :
To a stirred solution of 2-(3-methoxyphenyl)acetonitrile (6.5g, 44.1mmol), 40% aq tetrabutylammonium hydroxide (4.5ml) and 50% aq NaOH (30ml) in toluene (30ml) was added 1 ,2-dibromoethane (10ml, 116mmol) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred for 16 hours, diluted with EtOAc and washed with water and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated, and purified by flash chromatography on a short silica gel column (hex: ethyl acetate, 9:1) to give the title compound.
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): 1.41-1.43 (m, 2H); 1.70-1.71 (m, 2H); 3.8 (s, 3H); 6.84- 6.88 (m, 3H); 7.25 (t, IH).
Step B: Preparation of l-(3-hydroxyphenyl)cyclopropanecarbonitrile:
To a stirred solution of l-(3-methoxyphenyl)cyclopropanecarbonitrile (Step A, 6.4g,
37mmol) in methylene chloride (30ml) was added BBr3 (IM in CH2Cl2, 80ml) at -780C under argon, the cold bath was substituted by ice bath after 30 minutes and reaction was stirred at the same temperature for 2 hours and then 30 minutes at room temperature. The reaction mixture was quenched by addition of ice and worked up by washing with water and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated, and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (methylene chloride: ethyl acetate, 5:1) to give the title compound.
Step C: Preparation of l-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)cyclopropanecarbonitrile:
A solution of 2,6-Dimethylbenzyl alcohol (2.8 Ig, 20.6mmol) and diisopropyl azodicarboxylate (DIAD, 4.69g, 23.2mmol) in THF (20 ml) was added drop wise to a solution of l-(3-hydroxyphenyl)cyclopropanecarbonitrile (Step B, 3.2g, 20.1mmol) and triphenylphosphine (5.37g, 20.5mmol) in THF (50ml) at O0C under argon. The reaction mixture was stirred at the same temperature for 16 hours, diluted with ether and washed with water. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated, and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hex: ethyl acetate, 9:1) to give the title compound.
Step D: Preparation of l-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)cyclopropanecarbaldehyde:
To a stirred solution of l-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)cyclopropanecarbonitrile (Step C, 4.6g, 16.6mmol) in dry methylene chloride (40ml) at -780C under argon was added DIBAL-H drop wise (I M solution in CH2Cl2, 40ml), and the reaction mixture was stirred at the same temperature for 6 hours or until the reaction is complete as indicated by TLC. The reaction mixture was slowly quenched with ice cold water and the product was extracted with CH2Cl2 (2X), the organic phase was washed with IM HCl, brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hex: ether, 9:1) to give the title compound.
Step E: Preparation of l-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)cyclopropanecarboxylic acid:
To a stirred solution of l-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)cyclopropanecarbaldehyde (Step D, 3.5g, 12.5mmol) in acetone (50ml) was added drop wise jones reagent (15ml) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred for 6 hours, diluted in EtOAc and washed with water, brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (chloroform: methanol, 95:5 spiked with acetic acid) to give the title compound. 1H NMR (400 MHz, d-DMSO): 1.12-1.15 (m, 2H); 1.40-1.43 (m, 2H); 2.32 (s, 6H); 5.0 (s, 2H); 6.90-6.96 (m, 3H); 7.05 (d, 2H); 7.13-7.17 (m, IH); 7.20-7.24 (t, IH).
EXAMPLE 24
Figure imgf000092_0001
2-(3-(2-Chloro-6-methylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid
Step A: Preparation of (2-chloro-6-methylphenyl)methanol:
To a stirred solution of 2-chloro-6-methylbenzaldehyde (6.1 Ig, 39.5mmol) in THF (2): methanol(3) (30ml) was added in portion NaBH4 (2.24g, 59.28mmol) at O0C under argon. The reaction mixture was stirred at the same temperature for 1.3 hours and then quenched with cold sat. NH4Cl solution, extracted with EtOAc, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated, and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hex: ethyl acetate, 2:1) to give the title compound.
Step B: Preparation of Ethyl 2-(3-(2-chloro-6-methylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetate:
A solution of (2-chloro-6-methylphenyl)methanol (Step A, 3g, 19.1mmol) and diisopropyl azodicarboxylate (DIAD, 4.13ml, 21mmol) in THF (20 ml) was added drop wise to a solution of ethyl 2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)acetate (3.79g, 21mmol) and triphenylphosphine (5.48g, 21mmol) in THF (30ml) at O0C under argon. The reaction mixture was stirred at the same temperature for 4 hours, diluted with ether and washed with water. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated, and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hex: ethyl acetate, 2:1) to give the title compound. Step C: Preparation of 2-(3-(2-Chloro-6-methylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid:
To a stirred solution of Ethyl 2-(3-(2-chloro-6-methylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetate (Step B, 4.94g, 15.5mmol) in absolute ethanol (80ml) was added IN NaOH (40ml) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred for 3 hours, acidified to pH 3.5-4.0 by adding IN HCl and concentrated. The residue was taken into chloroform and washed with .1N HCl, brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (chloroform: methanol, 95:5 spiked with acetic acid) to give the title compound.
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): 2.4 (s, 3H); 3.7 (s, 2H); 5.2 (s, 2H); 6.9 (m, 3H); 7.2-7.3 (m, 3H); 7.4 (m, IH).
EXAMPLE 25
Figure imgf000093_0001
2-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-methylphenyl)acetic acid
Step A: Preparation of 2-(3-methoxy-4-methylphenyl)acetic acid:
To a stirred solution of 2-(3-methoxy-4-methylphenyl)acetonitrile (5g, 31mmol) in abs ethanol (25ml) was added 2M NaOH (20ml) at room temperature and reaction mixture was re fluxed for 16 hours or until starting material is gone. The reaction mixture was concentrated, diluted in chloroform and pH was adjusted to 4 by addition of IN HCl, The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated, to give off white solid. The solid was washed with hexane, filtered, dried under vacuum and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (chloroform: methanol, 95:5) to give the title compound. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): 2.19 (s, 3H); 3.62 (s, 2H); 3.82 (s, 3H); 6.74 (m, 3H); 7.14 (d, IH).
Step B: Preparation of Ethyl 2-(3-methoxy-4-methylphenyl)acetate:
To a stirred solution of 2-(3-methoxy-4-methylphenyl)acetic acid (Step A, 4.64g, 25.7mmol) in ethanol (100ml) was added p-TsOH (Jg, 3.7mmol) at room temperature under argon and the reaction mixture was re fluxed for 12 hours or until all the starting material is consumed, concentrated, diluted in EtOAc and washed with .1N HCl, brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hexane: ethyl acetate, 2:1) to give the title compound.
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): 1.25 (t, 3H); 2.10 (s, 3H); 3.57 (s, 2H); 3.82 (s, 3H); 4.14 (q, 2H); 6.76 (m, 3H); 7.14 (d, IH).
Step C: Preparation of Ethyl 2-(3-hydroxy-4-methylphenyl)acetate:
To a stirred solution of Ethyl 2-(3-methoxy-4-methylphenyl)acetate (Step B, 4.12g, 19.8mmol) in methylene chloride (30ml) was added BBr3 (IM in CH2Cl2, 25ml) at -780C under argon, the cold bath was substituted by ice bath after 30 minutes and the reaction mixture was stirred at the same temperature for 2 hours and then 30 minutes at room temperature. The reaction mixture was quenched by addition of ice and worked up by washing with water and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated, and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hexane: ethyl acetate, 2: 1) to give the title compound.
Step D: Preparation of Ethyl 2-(3-(2,6-dimethybenzyloxy)-4-methylphenyl)acetate:
To a stirred solution of Ethyl 2-(3-hydroxy-4-methylphenyl)acetate (Step C, 1.84g, 9.5mmol), K2CO3 (1.96g, 14.2mmol) in DMF (10ml) was added 2,6-Dimethylbenzyl chloride (1.6 Ig, 10.4mmol) at room temperature under argon. The reaction mixture was stirred for 16 hours at the room temperature, diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with water (2X), and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated, and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hexane: ethyl acetate, 4:1) to give the title compound.
Step E: Preparation of 2-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-methylphenyl)acetic acid:
To a stirred solution of Ethyl 2-(3-(2,6-dimethybenzyloxy)-4-methylphenyl)acetate (Step D, l.lg, 3.5mmol) in absolute ethanol (20ml) was added IN NaOH (7ml) at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred for 3 hours, acidified to pH 3.5-4.0 by adding IN HCl and concentrated. The residue was taken into chloroform and washed with .1N HCl, brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (chloroform: methanol, 95:5 spiked with acetic acid) to give the title compound.
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): 2.15 (s, 3H); 2.38 (s, 6H); 3.67 (s, 2H); 5.02 (s, 2H); 6.8 (d, IH); 6.9 (s, IH); 7.0-7.2 (m, 4H).
EXAMPLE 26
Figure imgf000095_0001
2-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-fluorophenyl)acetic acid
Step A: Preparation of Ethyl 3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-fluorobenzoate:
To a stirred solution of Ethyl 4-fluoro-3-hydroxybenzoate (2.814g, 15.3mmol), K2CO3 (1.95g, 14.1mmol) in DMF (15ml) was added 2,6-Dimethylbenzyl chloride (2.21g, 14.3mmol) at room temperature under argon. The reaction mixture was stirred for 16 hours at the room temperature, diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with water (2X), and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated, and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hexane: ethyl acetate, 4:1) to give the title compound. Step B: Preparation of (3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-fluorophenyl)methanol:
The solution of Ethyl 3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-fluorobenzoate (Step A, 4.2g, 13.9mmol) in dry THF (20ml) was added slowly to a suspension Of LiAlH4 (.72g) in dry
THF (20ml) at -780C under argon. The cold bath was replaced by ice bath and the reaction mixture was left to stir for 3 hours or until reaction is complete, quenched very slowly with ice and diluted with ethyl acetate. The organic layer was washed with .1N
HCl, brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hexane: ethyl acetate, 5:1) to give the title compound.
Step C: Preparation of 2-((5-(chloromethyl)-2-fluorophenoxy)methyl)-l,3- dimethylbenzene :
To a stirred solution of (3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-fluorophenyl)methanol (Step B, 3.7g, 14.21mmol), triethylamine (5g, 50mmol) in CH2Cl2 (50ml) was added mesyl chloride (10.34g, 90.2mmol) at O0C under argon. The reaction mixture was stirred for 6 hours, washed with 10% Na2COs, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hexane: ethyl acetate, 5:1) to give the title compound.
Step D: Preparation of 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-fluorophenyl)acetonitrile:
To a stirred solution of 2-((5-(chloromethyl)-2-fluorophenoxy)methyl)-l,3- dimethylbenzene (Step C, 4g, 14.3mmol), KI (.33g) in DMF (30ml) was added NaCN (1.02g, 20.8mmol). The reaction mixture was heated at 1000C for 4 hours, concentrated, diluted with EtOAc and washed with water (2X), dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (hexane: methylene chloride, 1 : 1) to give the title compound.
Step E: Preparation of 2-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-fluorophenyl)acetic acid: To a stirred solution of 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-fluorophenyl)acetonitrile (Step D, 1.44g, 5.34mmol) in ethanol (30ml) was added 2N NaOH (15ml) and reaction mixture was refluxed for 16 hours, cooled by adding ice and acidified with IN HCl to pH 4, and diluted with chloroform. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4, filtered, concentrated and purified by flash chromatography on a silica gel column (chloroform: methanol, 95:5) to give the title compound.
1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): 2.43 (s, 6H); 3.65 (s, 2H); 5.12 (s, 2H); 6.8 (m, IH); 7.0- 7.15 (m, 4H); 7.17 (m, IH).
EXAMPLE 27
Rat oral single-dose pharmacokinetic study with Compound EH
Protocol:
A. Plasma.
1. Male Sprague-Dowley rats received single oral gavage of Compound EH, 100 mg/kg, and plasma was collected at certain times. 2. Rat plasma was stored at -80 0C until the day of analysis.
3. Samples were thawed on 37 0C bath for 5 min and vortexed at top speed for 10 sec.
4. Rat plasma, 0.1 mL was mixed with 0.2 mL Acetonitrile, vortexed 1 min, spun down 14000 rpm, 1700Og, at 4 0C, for 25 min.
5. Supernatants were filtered through 0.45micron, 4 mm, PTFE membrane syringe filter (Phenomenex # AF0-3102-52), and 15 microL were injected and resolved on Luna 3 micron, IOOA pore, C8(2), 150x3mm, reverse phase column (Phenomenex# 00F-4248- YO, SN#259151-7) in 50 min linear gradient from 40% to 69% of (0.1% Formic Acid, 89.9%Acetonitrile, 10% Methanol) at 0.25 niL/min, 107 bar, 37 0C column temperature, method 406975M1, Sequence 0226-09A, Agilent 1100 LC- MS.
All samples were run in duplicate, 210nm and 230nm Absorbances, Negative and Positive ionization spectrograms recorded. B. Calibration curve.
Step 1. Rat plasma from V2 and V3 animals ("vehicle", pooled), 0.19 mL, was mixed with 0.01 mL 2Ox stock of Compound EH in Methanol to make 500 microM, 250 microM, 125 microM, ..., concentrations of Compound EH in plasma.
For example: 190 microL plasma + 10 microL of 10 mM Compound EH in methanol=
0.2 mL plasma with 500 microM Compound EH.
Step 2. Samples from step 1 were vortexed for 10 sec at top speed.
Step 3. 0.4 mL of acetonitrile was added to all samples from Step 2, and all vials were vortexed at top speed for 1 min.
Step 4. AU samples from step 3 were spun down 14000 rpm, 1700Og, at 4 0C, for 25 min.
Step 5. Supernatants were filtered through 0.45micron, 4 mm, PTFE membrane syringe filter (Phenomenex # AF0-3102-52), 15 microL were injected and resolved on Luna 3 micron, IOOA pore, C8(2), 150x3mm, reverse phase column
(Phenomenex# 00F-4248-YO, SN#259151-7) in 50 min linear gradient from 40% to 69% of (0.1% Formic Acid, 89.9%Acetonitrile, 10% Methanol) at 0.25 ml/min, 107 bar, 37 0C column temp, method 406975M1, Agilent 1100 LC-MS.
All samples were run in duplicate, 210nm and 230nm Absorbances, Negative and Positive ionization spectrograms recorded.
HPLC conditions:
Table 7.
HLPC gradient time solvent C solvent D min % %
0 60 40
2 60 40 Solvent C: 0.1% Formic Acid in water
52 31 69 Solvent D: 0.1% Formic Acid, 89.9% Acetonitrile, 10% Methanol
58 31 69
60 60 40
75 60 40 RESULTS:
1. Calibration curve (Figure 4) was built with RΛ2 fit to linearity = 0.9986. Table 8.
Figure imgf000099_0001
2. Compound EH was readily detected in rat plasma, Retention times and mass confirmed in both Positive and Negative ionization modes. (Figure 5). "M-" = 283.2, 100%; 567.2,
73%.
"M+" = 302.4 (+H2O) 95%; 214.4 100%; 307.2 75%; 179.2 70%. Formula weight 284.
Table 9.
Figure imgf000099_0002
EXAMPLE 28: Mouse oral single-dose pharmacokinetic study with Compound EH. Protocol: A. Plasma.
1. Mice received single oral gavage of Compound EH, 100 mg/kg, and plasma was collected at certain times.
2. Plasma was stored at -80 0C until the day of analysis. 3. Samples were thawed on 37 0C bath for 5 min and vortexed at top speed for 10 sec.
4. Mouse plasma, 0.1 mL was mixed with 0.2 mL Acetonitrile, vortexed 1 min, spun down 14000 rpm, 1700Og, at 4 0C, for 25 min.
5. Supernatants were filtered through 0.45micron, 4 mm, PTFE membrane syringe filter (Phenomenex # AF0-3102-52), and 15 microL were injected and resolved on Luna 3 micron, IOOA pore, C8(2), 150x3mm, reverse phase column (Phenomenex# 00F-4248- YO, SN#259151-7) in 50 min linear gradient from 40% to 69% of (0.1% Formic Acid, 89.9%Acetonitrile, 10% Methanol) at 0.25 niL/min, 100 bar, 37 0C column temperature, method 406975M1, Sequence 0205-09A, Agilent 1100 LC- MS. All samples were run in duplicate, 210nm and 230nm Absorbances, Negative and Positive ionization spectrograms recorded.
B. Calibration curve.
Step 1. Plasma from "Vehicle" animals (pooled), 0.19 mL, was mixed with 0.01 mL 2Ox stock of Compound EH in Methanol to make 500 microM, 250 microM, 125 microM, ..., concentrations of Compound EH in plasma.
For example: 190 microL plasma + 10 microL of 10 mM Compound EH in methanol=
0.2 mL plasma with 500 microM Compound EH. Step 2. Samples from step 1 were vortexed for 10 sec at top speed.
Step 3. 0.4 mL of acetonitrile was added to all samples from Step 2, and all vials were vortexed at top speed for 1 min.
Step 4. AU samples from step 3 were spun down 14000 rpm, 1700Og, at 4 0C, for 25 min. Step 5. Supernatants were filtered through 0.45micron, 4 mm, PTFE membrane syringe filter (Phenomenex # AFO-3102-52), 15 microL were injected and resolved on Luna 3 micron, IOOA pore, C8(2), 150x3mm, reverse phase column
(Phenomenex# 00F-4248-YO, SN#259151-7) in 50 min linear gradient from 40% to 69% of (0.1 % Formic Acid, 89.9%Acetonitrile, 10% Methanol) at 0.25 ml/min, 100 bar, 37 0C column temp, method 406975M1, Agilent 1100 LC-MS.
All samples were run in duplicate, 210nm and 230nm Absorbances, Negative and Positive ionization spectrograms recorded.
HPLC conditions:
Table 10. HLPC gradient
Lme solvent C solvent D nin % %
0 60 40
2 60 40 Solvent C: 0.1% Formic Acid in water
52 31 69 Solvent D: 0.1% Formic Acid, 89.9% Acetonitrile, 10% Methanol
58 31 69
60 60 40
75 60 40
Results:
1. Compound EH was readily detected in mouse plasma, Retention times and mass confirmed in Positive and Negative ionization modes. AGILENT LC-MS sequence
0205-09A. (Figure 6).
"M-" = 283.2 100%, 567.2 47%.
"M+" = 214.0 100%, 179.2 97%, 214.4 95 %, 302.4 85% (Compound H+H2O=302) Formula weight 284, Retention Time average = 35 min.
Table 11.
Figure imgf000102_0001
Table 12.
Figure imgf000103_0001
Table 13.
Figure imgf000103_0002
Cmax = 440 microM
T V2 = 8.05 HR
AUC = 2588 microM * HR

Claims

CLAIMSWhat is claimed is:
1. A method of reducing the uric acid concentration in blood of, or increasing uric acid excretion from, a mammalian subject, comprising administering to the subject a compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof
Figure imgf000104_0001
wherein:
m is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4; n is O or i; m + n is not more than 4; t is O or l; q is O or l; r is 0, 1 or 2:
R6 is hydrogen, methyl or ethyl and R12 is hydrogen or methyl, or R6 is hydroxy and R12 is hydrogen, or R6 is O and R12 is absent, or R6 and R12 together are -CH2CH2-;
R is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms;
one of R8 and R9 is alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and the other is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms;
R10 is hydrogen, halo, alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms; X is C(O) and r is 0 and t is 0; or NH(R11) wherein R11 hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms; A is phenyl, unsubstituted or substituted by 1 or 2 groups selected from halo, hydroxy, methyl, ethyl, perfluoromethyl, methoxy, ethoxy, and perfluoromethoxy; or a 5 or 6 membered heteroaromatic ring having 1 or 2 ring heteroatoms selected from N, S and O and the heteroaromatic ring is covalently bound to the remainder of the compound of Formula I by a ring carbon; or cycloalkyl having from 3 to 6 ring carbon atoms wherein the cycloalkyl is unsubstituted or one or two ring carbons are independently monosubstituted by methyl or ethyl;
in an amount effective to reduce the uric acid concentration in blood of, or increase uric acid excretion from, the subject.
2. The method of claim 1 , wherein A is substituted or unsubstituted phenyl.
3. The method of claim 2, wherein A is 2,6-dimethylphenyl.
4. The method of claim 1 , wherein r is 1 , t is 0, and q is 0.
5. The method of claim 1, wherein R 10 is methoxy.
6. The method of claim 1 , wherein the Compound is represented by Formula IA
Figure imgf000105_0001
wherein:
m is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4; n is 0 or 1 ; m + n is not more than 4; t is 0 or 1 ; q is 0 or 1 ; r is 0, 1 or 2;
R6 is hydrogen, methyl or ethyl and R12 is hydrogen or methyl, or R6 is hydroxy and
R12 is hydrogen, or R6 is O and R12 is absent, or R6 and R12 together are -CH2CH2-;
R7 is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms;
one of R8 and R9 is alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and the other is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms;
R10 is hydrogen, halo, alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms; X is C(O) and r is 0 and t is 0; or NH(R11) wherein R11 hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms; A is phenyl, unsubstituted or substituted by 1 or 2 groups selected from halo, hydroxy, methyl, ethyl, perfluoromethyl, methoxy, ethoxy, and perfluoromethoxy; or a 5 or 6 membered heteroaromatic ring having 1 or 2 ring heteroatoms selected from N, S and O and the heteroaromatic ring is covalently bound to the remainder of the compound of Formula I by a ring carbon; or cycloalkyl having from 3 to 6 ring carbon atoms wherein the cycloalkyl is unsubstituted or one or two ring carbons are independently monosubstituted by methyl or ethyl.
7. The method of claim 6, wherein the Compound is represented by Formula IAl
Figure imgf000107_0001
wherein two of R1, R2, R3, R4 and R5 are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, hydroxy, methyl, ethyl, perfluoromethyl, methoxy, ethoxy and perfluoromethoxy, and the remainder are hydrogen;
m is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4; n is 0 or 1 ; m + n is not more than 4;
R6 is hydrogen, methyl or ethyl and R12 is hydrogen or methyl, or R6 is hydroxy and
R12 is hydrogen, or R6 is O and R12 is absent, or R6 and R12 together are -CH2CH2-; R7 is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms;
one of R8 and R9 is alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and the other is hydrogen or alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms;
R , 10 is hydrogen, halo, alkyl having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
8. The method of claim 7, wherein R1 is methyl and R5 is methyl.
9. The method of claim 8, wherein the Compound is selected from the group consisting of:
4-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutyric acid; 3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)-phenylacetic acid; and 4-3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)-phenyl)-4-hydroxybutanoic acid.
10. The method of claim 8, wherein the Compound is 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-methylphenyl)acetic acid.
11. The method of claim 8, wherein the Compound is selected from the group consisting of: 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-methoxyphenyl)acetic acid;
4-(3-(2-Methylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid; 4-(3-(2,6-Difluorobenzyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid; 4-(3-(2-Fluoro-6-methylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid; 4-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-2,2-dimethyl-4-oxobutanoic acid; 4-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)butanoic acid; Methyl 3-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-3-oxopropanoate; 5-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-5-oxopentanoic acid; 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-2-oxoacetic acid; 5-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)pentanoic acid; 3-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)propanoic acid; 2-(3-(2,6-Difluorobenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid; 4-(3-(2,6-Dichlorobenzyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid; 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)propanoic acid; 2-(3 -(4-Trifluoromethyl)benzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid; 2-(3-(2,4-bis(trifluoromethyl)benzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid; 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)butanoic acid; 2-(3-(3,5-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid; 2-(3-(2,4-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid; 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethoxylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid; 2-(3-(Benzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid;
2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)propanoic acid;
2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)butanoic acid;
2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-2-methylpropanoic acid;
1 -(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)cyclopropanecarboxylic acid; and
2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-fluorophenyl)acetic acid.
12. The method of claim 6, wherein the Compound is selected from the group consisting of:
4-(3-(Cyclopropylmethoxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid; 4-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzoyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid; and 2-(3-(2-Chloro-6-methylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid.
13. The method of claim 1, wherein the Compound is selected from the group consisting of:
4-oxo-4-(4-(pyridin-2-ylmethoxy)phenyl)butanoic acid; 4-(4-(Benzyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid; 4-(4-(2,6-Difluorobenzyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid; 4-(4-(2,5-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid; 4-(4-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid; 4-(4-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)-3-methoxyphenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid; 2-(4-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid; and 2-(2-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid.
14. A method for treating or preventing a condition selected from the group consisting of gout, hyperuricemia, elevated levels of uric acid that do not meet the levels customarily justifying a diagnosis of hyperuricemia, renal dysfunction, kidney stones, cardiovascular disease, risk for developing cardiovascular disease, tumor-lysis syndrome, cognitive impairment, and early-onset essential hypertension, comprising the method of claim 1.
15. The method of claim 1, wherein the subject is a human.
16. The method of claim 1, further comprising administering to the subject one or more other uric acid lowering drugs in a combined amount effective to reduce the uric acid concentration in blood of, or increase uric acid excretion from, the subject.
17. The method of claim 16, wherein the other uric acid lowering drug is selected from the group consisting of a xanthine oxidase inhibitor, a uricosuric agent, a urate transporter- 1 inhibitor, a uricase, and a statin.
18. The method of claim 16, wherein the other uric acid lowering drug is administered in an amount that is less than the usual therapeutic dose when administered alone.
19. The method of claim 16, wherein the Compound of Formula I or salt thereof and the one or more other uric acid lowering drugs are mixed together to form an admixture and the admixture is administered to the subject.
20. The method of claim 16, wherein the Compound of Formula I or salt thereof and the one or more other uric acid lowering drugs are not mixed together to form an admixture but are administered independently to the subject.
21. The method of claim 1 , wherein the Compound of Formula I or salt thereof is formulated for oral administration.
22. Use of a biologically active agent in the manufacture of a medicament for reducing the uric acid concentration in blood of, or increasing uric acid excretion from, a mammalian subject, wherein the agent is a Compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof as recited in any one of claims 1-13:
23. The use of claim 22, wherein the medicament is formulated for oral administration.
24. The use of claim 22, wherein the amount is selected so that administration of the medicament to a mammalian subject results in treatment or prevention of a condition selected from the group consisting of gout, hyperuricemia, elevated levels of uric acid that do not meet the levels customarily justifying a diagnosis of hyperuricemia, renal dysfunction, kidney stones, cardiovascular disease, risk for developing cardiovascular disease, tumor-lysis syndrome, cognitive impairment, and early-onset essential hypertension.
25. The use of claim 22, wherein the medicament is formulated for administration in combination with one or more other uric acid lowering drugs in a combined amount effective to reduce the uric acid concentration in blood of, or increase uric acid excretion from, the subject.
26. The use of claim 25, wherein the other uric acid lowering drug is selected from the group consisting of a xanthine oxidase inhibitor, a uricosuric agent, a urate transporter- 1 inhibitor, a uricase, and a statin.
27. The use of claim 25, wherein the other uric acid lowering drug is administered in an amount that is less than the usual therapeutic dose when administered alone.
28. The use of claim 25, wherein the medicament comprises the Compound of Formula I or salt thereof and the one or more other uric acid lowering drugs mixed together in the form of an admixture.
29. The use of claim 25, wherein the Compound of Formula I or salt thereof and the one or more other uric acid lowering drugs are not mixed together in the form of an admixture.
30. A pharmaceutical composition for use in reducing the uric acid concentration in blood of, or increasing uric acid excretion from, a mammalian subject, comprising a Compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof as recited in any one of claims 1 to 13.
31. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 30, for use in treating or preventing a condition selected from the group consisting of gout, hyperuricemia, elevated levels of uric acid that do not meet the levels customarily justifying a diagnosis of hyperuricemia, renal dysfunction, kidney stones, cardiovascular disease, risk for developing cardiovascular disease, tumor-lysis syndrome, cognitive impairment, and early-onset essential hypertension.
32. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 30, formulated for administration in combination with one or more other uric acid lowering drugs in a combined amount effective to reduce the uric acid concentration in blood of, or increase uric acid excretion from, the subject.
33. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 32, wherein the other uric acid lowering drug is selected from the group consisting of a xanthine oxidase inhibitor, a uricosuric agent, a urate transporter- 1 inhibitor, a uricase, and a statin.
34. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 32, wherein the other uric acid lowering drug is administered in an amount that is less than the usual therapeutic dose when administered alone.
35. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 32, wherein the medicament comprises the Compound of Formula I or salt thereof and the one or more other uric acid lowering drugs mixed together in the form of an admixture.
I l l
36. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 32, wherein the Compound of Formula
I or salt thereof and the one or more other uric acid lowering drugs are not mixed together in the form of an admixture.
37. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 30, formulated for oral administration.
38. 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-methylphenyl)acetic acid, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
39. A compound selected from the group consisting of: 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-methoxyphenyl)acetic acid Methyl 3-(3-(2,6-dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-3-oxopropanoate; 2-(3-(2,6-Difluorobenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid; 4-(3-(2,6-Dichlorobenzyloxy)phenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid; 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)propanoic acid;
2-(3 -(4-Trifluoromethyl)benzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid; 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)butanoic acid; 2-(3-(3,5-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid; 2-(3-(2,4-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid; 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethoxylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid; 2-(3-(Benzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid; 2-(2-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid; 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)propanoic acid; 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)butanoic acid; 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)-2-methylpropanoic acid; l-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)phenyl)cyclopropanecarboxylic acid; 2-(3-(2-Chloro-6-methylbenzyloxy)phenyl)acetic acid; and 2-(3-(2,6-Dimethylbenzyloxy)-4-fluorophenyl)acetic acid, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
PCT/US2009/037128 2008-03-13 2009-03-13 Compounds and method for reducing uric acid WO2009151695A1 (en)

Priority Applications (22)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP09762990.1A EP2268141B1 (en) 2008-03-13 2009-03-13 Compound and method for reducing uric acid
NZ587433A NZ587433A (en) 2008-03-13 2009-03-13 Compounds and method for reducing uric acid
CN200980108707.1A CN101969773B (en) 2008-03-13 2009-03-13 For reducing the Compounds and methods for of uric acid
UAA201012059A UA103894C2 (en) 2008-03-13 2009-03-13 Compounds and a method for reducing the level of uric acid
US12/920,555 US8829058B2 (en) 2008-03-13 2009-03-13 Compounds and method for reducing uric acid
BRPI0924547-2A BRPI0924547B1 (en) 2008-03-13 2009-03-13 2-(3-(2,6-DIMETHYLBENZYLOXY)-4-METHYLPHENYL)ACETIC ACID COMPOUND, ITS COMPOSITION, AS WELL AS ITS USE
RU2010141823/15A RU2501554C2 (en) 2008-03-13 2009-03-13 Compounds and methods for uric acid reduction
AU2009258040A AU2009258040B8 (en) 2008-03-13 2009-03-13 Compounds and method for reducing uric acid
MX2010009959A MX2010009959A (en) 2008-03-13 2009-03-13 Compounds and method for reducing uric acid.
BRPI0909299-4A BRPI0909299B1 (en) 2008-03-13 2009-03-13 COMPOUNDS AND METHODS FOR REDUCING URIC ACID
MX2013011790A MX342806B (en) 2008-03-13 2009-03-13 Compounds and method for reducing uric acid.
JP2010550897A JP5339545B2 (en) 2008-03-13 2009-03-13 Compounds and methods for reducing uric acid
CA2716860A CA2716860C (en) 2008-03-13 2009-03-13 Compounds and method for reducing uric acid
KR1020107021875A KR101677944B1 (en) 2008-03-13 2009-03-13 Compounds and method for reducing uric acid
KR1020147023462A KR101677945B1 (en) 2008-03-13 2009-03-13 Compounds and method for reducing uric acid
DK09762990.1T DK2268141T3 (en) 2008-03-13 2009-03-13 CONNECTION AND PROCEDURE TO REDUCE URIC ACID
EP19158335.0A EP3517109A1 (en) 2008-03-13 2009-03-13 Compounds and method for reducing uric acid
ES09762990T ES2741153T3 (en) 2008-03-13 2009-03-13 Compounds and procedure to reduce uric acid
ZA2010/05872A ZA201005872B (en) 2008-03-13 2010-08-17 Compounds and method for reducing uric acid
IL208004A IL208004A (en) 2008-03-13 2010-09-06 Compounds for reducing uric acid and uses thereof
US13/890,789 US9115072B2 (en) 2008-03-13 2013-05-09 Compounds and method for reducing uric acid
IL247136A IL247136B (en) 2008-03-13 2016-08-07 Compounds for reducing uric acid and uses thereof

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US3629408P 2008-03-13 2008-03-13
US61/036,294 2008-03-13

Related Child Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/920,555 A-371-Of-International US8829058B2 (en) 2008-03-13 2009-03-13 Compounds and method for reducing uric acid
US13/890,789 Continuation US9115072B2 (en) 2008-03-13 2013-05-09 Compounds and method for reducing uric acid

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2009151695A1 true WO2009151695A1 (en) 2009-12-17
WO2009151695A4 WO2009151695A4 (en) 2010-03-04

Family

ID=41417026

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2009/037128 WO2009151695A1 (en) 2008-03-13 2009-03-13 Compounds and method for reducing uric acid

Country Status (17)

Country Link
US (2) US8829058B2 (en)
EP (2) EP2268141B1 (en)
JP (2) JP5339545B2 (en)
KR (2) KR101677945B1 (en)
CN (2) CN101969773B (en)
AU (1) AU2009258040B8 (en)
BR (2) BRPI0924547B1 (en)
CA (1) CA2716860C (en)
DK (1) DK2268141T3 (en)
ES (1) ES2741153T3 (en)
IL (2) IL208004A (en)
MX (2) MX342806B (en)
NZ (2) NZ602321A (en)
RU (2) RU2501555C2 (en)
UA (2) UA103894C2 (en)
WO (1) WO2009151695A1 (en)
ZA (1) ZA201005872B (en)

Cited By (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP2488020A1 (en) * 2009-10-13 2012-08-22 Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation 3-substituted compounds for reducing uric acid
US8410154B2 (en) 2008-04-30 2013-04-02 Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation Tetrazole compounds for reducing uric acid
WO2013155478A1 (en) * 2012-04-13 2013-10-17 Metabolex, Inc. Method for treating hyperuricemia in patients with gout using halofenate or halofenic acid and an anti-inflammatory agent
WO2014017643A1 (en) 2012-07-27 2014-01-30 佐藤製薬株式会社 Difluoromethylene compound
US8987473B2 (en) 2011-01-28 2015-03-24 Sato Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Ring-fused compound
US9023856B2 (en) 2011-11-04 2015-05-05 Cymabay Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for treating hyperuricemia in patients with gout using halofenate or halogenic acid and a second urate-lowering agent
US9060987B2 (en) 2011-11-04 2015-06-23 Cymabay Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for treating gout flares
US10085957B2 (en) 2010-09-08 2018-10-02 Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation Benzoic acid compounds for reducing uric acid

Families Citing this family (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
UA103894C2 (en) 2008-03-13 2013-12-10 Уеллстат Терепьютикс Корпорейшн Compounds and a method for reducing the level of uric acid
WO2012125533A1 (en) * 2011-03-14 2012-09-20 Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation 3-benzyloxyphenyloxoacetic acid compounds for reducing uric acid
WO2017083652A1 (en) * 2015-11-13 2017-05-18 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Fluorenone compound for the treatment of gout
US12057228B1 (en) * 2015-12-30 2024-08-06 Cerner Innovation, Inc. Predicting newly incident chronic kidney disease
CN106190953B (en) * 2016-07-25 2019-12-10 华南理工大学 Hyperuricemia cell model, construction method thereof and application of hyperuricemia cell model in aspect of uric acid reduction efficacy evaluation
CN106190954B (en) * 2016-07-25 2019-12-10 华南理工大学 Hyperuricemia hepatocyte model and construction method thereof
KR101988867B1 (en) 2017-07-25 2019-06-13 광주과학기술원 Composition for uric acid decomposition using gold nanoparticles
WO2019066469A1 (en) * 2017-09-27 2019-04-04 경북대학교 산학협력단 Use of febuxostat or topiroxostat as agent for prevention and treatment of cancer metastasis
WO2021194294A1 (en) * 2020-03-27 2021-09-30 가톨릭대학교 산학협력단 Avatar model platform for evaluating autoimmune diseases

Citations (14)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0279630A1 (en) 1987-02-16 1988-08-24 Konica Corporation Developer for light-sensitive lithographic printing plate capable of processing commonly the negative-type and the positive type and developer composition for light-sensitive material
WO1995004046A1 (en) 1993-07-28 1995-02-09 Rhone-Poulenc Rorer Limited Compounds as pde iv and tnf inhibitors
WO1995009843A1 (en) 1993-10-07 1995-04-13 Agouron Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Hiv protease inhibitors
WO1996028423A1 (en) 1995-03-15 1996-09-19 Sankyo Company, Limited Dipeptide compounds having ahpba structure
WO2002100341A2 (en) 2001-06-12 2002-12-19 Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation Compounds for the treatment of metabolic disorders
US20030220399A1 (en) * 1999-06-04 2003-11-27 Metabolex, Inc. Use of (-) (3-trihalomethylphenoxy) (4-halophenyl) acetic acid derivatives for treatment of insulin resistance, Type 2 diabetes, hyperlipidemia and hyperuricemia
WO2004073611A2 (en) 2003-02-13 2004-09-02 Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation Compounds for the treatment of metabolic disorders
WO2004091486A2 (en) 2003-04-15 2004-10-28 Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation Compounds for the treatment of metabolic disorders
WO2004098496A2 (en) 2003-04-30 2004-11-18 Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation Compounds for the treatment of metabolic disorders
US20070099846A1 (en) * 2003-05-30 2007-05-03 Lytone Enterprise, Inc. Composition containing dipeptide of histidine and alanine for reducing uric acid and method for reducing uric acid using the dipeptide
WO2007056771A2 (en) 2005-11-09 2007-05-18 Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation Compounds for the treatment of metabolic disorders
WO2007087506A2 (en) 2006-01-25 2007-08-02 Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation Compounds for the treatment of metabolic disorders
US20070197650A1 (en) 2006-02-21 2007-08-23 University Of Maryland, Baltimore Ethers of 3-hydroxyphenylacetic acid as selective gamma-hydroxybutyric acid receptor ligands
WO2007146768A2 (en) 2006-06-09 2007-12-21 Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation Compounds for the treatment of metabolic disorders

Family Cites Families (14)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
FR2572512B1 (en) 1984-10-25 1987-09-25 Luchaire Sa DEVICE, ADAPTABLE ON MACHINERY OR AMMUNITION, SUCH AS ARTILLERY PROJECTILES, INTENDED TO REDUCE THEIR PANT TRAIL
AU1624801A (en) 1999-11-19 2001-05-30 Corvas International, Inc. Plasminogen activator inhibitor antagonists related applications
US7645772B2 (en) 2002-11-01 2010-01-12 Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation Treatment of metabolic disorders
AU2005247473A1 (en) 2004-05-25 2005-12-08 Metabolex, Inc. Substituted triazoles as modulators of PPAR and methods of their preparation
US7622491B2 (en) 2004-08-13 2009-11-24 Metabolex Inc. Modulators of PPAR and methods of their preparation
DE602005004988T2 (en) 2004-11-15 2009-03-26 The Pilot Ink Co., Ltd., Nagoya Reversible thermochromic composition and microcapsules containing them
AR051780A1 (en) 2004-11-29 2007-02-07 Japan Tobacco Inc FUSIONED RING COMPOUNDS CONTAINING NITROGEN AND USING THEMSELVES
US20070197512A1 (en) 2006-01-27 2007-08-23 Japan Tobacco Inc. Carboxylic Acid Compounds and Use Thereof
WO2007117791A2 (en) * 2006-03-31 2007-10-18 Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation Combination treatment of metabolic disorders
NZ574664A (en) * 2006-08-17 2012-06-29 Wellstat Therapeutics Corp Combination treatment for metabolic disorders comprising an incretin mimetic such as exendin or a dppv iv inhibitor
US8481595B2 (en) 2008-01-15 2013-07-09 Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation Compounds for the treatment of metabolic disorders
UA103894C2 (en) 2008-03-13 2013-12-10 Уеллстат Терепьютикс Корпорейшн Compounds and a method for reducing the level of uric acid
WO2009134995A2 (en) 2008-04-30 2009-11-05 Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation Tetrazole compounds for reducing uric acid
US20130331452A1 (en) 2010-09-08 2013-12-12 Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation Benzoic acid compounds for reducing uric acid

Patent Citations (16)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0279630A1 (en) 1987-02-16 1988-08-24 Konica Corporation Developer for light-sensitive lithographic printing plate capable of processing commonly the negative-type and the positive type and developer composition for light-sensitive material
WO1995004046A1 (en) 1993-07-28 1995-02-09 Rhone-Poulenc Rorer Limited Compounds as pde iv and tnf inhibitors
WO1995009843A1 (en) 1993-10-07 1995-04-13 Agouron Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Hiv protease inhibitors
WO1996028423A1 (en) 1995-03-15 1996-09-19 Sankyo Company, Limited Dipeptide compounds having ahpba structure
US20030220399A1 (en) * 1999-06-04 2003-11-27 Metabolex, Inc. Use of (-) (3-trihalomethylphenoxy) (4-halophenyl) acetic acid derivatives for treatment of insulin resistance, Type 2 diabetes, hyperlipidemia and hyperuricemia
WO2002100341A2 (en) 2001-06-12 2002-12-19 Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation Compounds for the treatment of metabolic disorders
US20050090555A1 (en) 2001-06-12 2005-04-28 Shalini Sharma Compound for the treatment of metabolic disorders
US20080015254A1 (en) * 2003-02-13 2008-01-17 Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation Compounds for the treatment of metabolic disorders
WO2004073611A2 (en) 2003-02-13 2004-09-02 Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation Compounds for the treatment of metabolic disorders
WO2004091486A2 (en) 2003-04-15 2004-10-28 Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation Compounds for the treatment of metabolic disorders
WO2004098496A2 (en) 2003-04-30 2004-11-18 Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation Compounds for the treatment of metabolic disorders
US20070099846A1 (en) * 2003-05-30 2007-05-03 Lytone Enterprise, Inc. Composition containing dipeptide of histidine and alanine for reducing uric acid and method for reducing uric acid using the dipeptide
WO2007056771A2 (en) 2005-11-09 2007-05-18 Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation Compounds for the treatment of metabolic disorders
WO2007087506A2 (en) 2006-01-25 2007-08-02 Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation Compounds for the treatment of metabolic disorders
US20070197650A1 (en) 2006-02-21 2007-08-23 University Of Maryland, Baltimore Ethers of 3-hydroxyphenylacetic acid as selective gamma-hydroxybutyric acid receptor ligands
WO2007146768A2 (en) 2006-06-09 2007-12-21 Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation Compounds for the treatment of metabolic disorders

Non-Patent Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
CHIRALITY, vol. 11, 1999, pages 420 - 425
CIRILLO ET AL.: "Uric acid, the metabolic syndrome, and renal disease", J. AM. SOC. NEPHROL., vol. 17, no. 12, S3, December 2006 (2006-12-01), pages S165 - S168, XP008143072 *
J. MED. CHEM, vol. 24, no. 10, 1981, pages 1245 - 49
J.A.C.S, vol. 96, no. 7, 1974, pages 2121 - 9
J.O.C, vol. 56, no. 14, 1991, pages 4525 - 29
J.O.C., vol. 66, 2001, pages 7883 - 88
POLYMER, vol. 32, no. 11, 1991, pages 2096 - 105
SCHRETLEN, D.J. ET AL.: "Serum Uric Acid and Cognitive Function in Community-Dwelling Older Adults", NEUROPSYCHOLOGY, vol. 21, no. 1, January 2007 (2007-01-01), pages 136 - 140

Cited By (20)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8410154B2 (en) 2008-04-30 2013-04-02 Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation Tetrazole compounds for reducing uric acid
US8889724B2 (en) 2008-04-30 2014-11-18 Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation Tetrazole compounds for reducing uric acid
EP2488020A4 (en) * 2009-10-13 2013-04-10 Wellstat Therapeutics Corp 3-substituted compounds for reducing uric acid
US8546448B2 (en) 2009-10-13 2013-10-01 Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation 3-substituted compounds for reducing uric acid
EP2488020A1 (en) * 2009-10-13 2012-08-22 Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation 3-substituted compounds for reducing uric acid
US10085957B2 (en) 2010-09-08 2018-10-02 Wellstat Therapeutics Corporation Benzoic acid compounds for reducing uric acid
US9359350B2 (en) 2011-01-28 2016-06-07 Sato Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Ring-fused compound
US8987473B2 (en) 2011-01-28 2015-03-24 Sato Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Ring-fused compound
US9439891B2 (en) 2011-11-04 2016-09-13 Cymabay Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for treating hyperuricemia in patients with gout using halofenate or halofenic acid and a second urate-lowering agent
US9060987B2 (en) 2011-11-04 2015-06-23 Cymabay Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for treating gout flares
US9023856B2 (en) 2011-11-04 2015-05-05 Cymabay Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for treating hyperuricemia in patients with gout using halofenate or halogenic acid and a second urate-lowering agent
US9433612B2 (en) 2011-11-04 2016-09-06 Cymabay Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for treating hyperuricemia in patients with gout using halofenate or halofenic acid and a second urate-lowering agent
US9801860B2 (en) 2011-11-04 2017-10-31 Cymabay Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for treating hyperuricemia in patients with gout using halofenate or halofenic acid and a second urate-lowering agent
WO2013155478A1 (en) * 2012-04-13 2013-10-17 Metabolex, Inc. Method for treating hyperuricemia in patients with gout using halofenate or halofenic acid and an anti-inflammatory agent
AU2013245675B2 (en) * 2012-04-13 2017-02-09 Cymabay Therapeutics, Inc. Method for treating hyperuricemia in patients with gout using halofenate or halofenic acid and an anti-inflammatory agent
EA028495B1 (en) * 2012-04-13 2017-11-30 Саймабэй Терапьютикс, Инк. Oral composition for treating gout based on (-)-halofenate and colchicine
WO2014017643A1 (en) 2012-07-27 2014-01-30 佐藤製薬株式会社 Difluoromethylene compound
US9650380B2 (en) 2012-07-27 2017-05-16 Sato Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Difluoromethylene compound
US9512119B2 (en) 2012-07-27 2016-12-06 Sato Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Difluoromethylene compound
EP3444238A2 (en) 2012-07-27 2019-02-20 Sato Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Process for preparing difluoromethylene compounds

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP5547222B2 (en) 2014-07-09
JP2012153690A (en) 2012-08-16
US9115072B2 (en) 2015-08-25
AU2009258040A8 (en) 2014-04-24
AU2009258040B8 (en) 2014-04-24
NZ602321A (en) 2013-02-22
UA103894C2 (en) 2013-12-10
CN101969773A (en) 2011-02-09
DK2268141T3 (en) 2019-07-29
BRPI0924547B1 (en) 2021-08-17
MX2010009959A (en) 2010-10-04
RU2501555C2 (en) 2013-12-20
EP2268141B1 (en) 2019-05-08
KR20140119149A (en) 2014-10-08
ZA201005872B (en) 2011-05-25
IL247136B (en) 2018-06-28
RU2012110592A (en) 2013-09-27
CA2716860A1 (en) 2009-12-17
JP5339545B2 (en) 2013-11-13
EP2268141A4 (en) 2011-09-14
KR20100127250A (en) 2010-12-03
ES2741153T3 (en) 2020-02-10
BRPI0924547A2 (en) 2015-06-23
EP2268141A1 (en) 2011-01-05
AU2009258040B2 (en) 2014-02-20
CA2716860C (en) 2017-08-29
CN101969773B (en) 2015-08-19
KR101677945B1 (en) 2016-11-29
US8829058B2 (en) 2014-09-09
MX342806B (en) 2016-10-13
IL208004A0 (en) 2010-12-30
EP3517109A1 (en) 2019-07-31
IL208004A (en) 2016-08-31
US20110014176A1 (en) 2011-01-20
RU2501554C2 (en) 2013-12-20
UA109638C2 (en) 2015-09-25
CN102976928A (en) 2013-03-20
WO2009151695A4 (en) 2010-03-04
CN102976928B (en) 2014-09-17
RU2010141823A (en) 2012-04-20
AU2009258040A1 (en) 2009-12-17
BRPI0909299A2 (en) 2014-02-04
JP2011515349A (en) 2011-05-19
BRPI0909299B1 (en) 2021-11-23
KR101677944B1 (en) 2016-11-21
NZ587433A (en) 2012-12-21
US20130259850A1 (en) 2013-10-03

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP2268141B1 (en) Compound and method for reducing uric acid
RU2522458C2 (en) Tetrazole compounds for reducing concentration of uric acid
US10085957B2 (en) Benzoic acid compounds for reducing uric acid
AU2013200226B2 (en) Compounds and method for reducing uric acid

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 200980108707.1

Country of ref document: CN

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 09762990

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2009258040

Country of ref document: AU

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 587433

Country of ref document: NZ

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2716860

Country of ref document: CA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 6064/DELNP/2010

Country of ref document: IN

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2010550897

Country of ref document: JP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 12920555

Country of ref document: US

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2009258040

Country of ref document: AU

Date of ref document: 20090313

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: MX/A/2010/009959

Country of ref document: MX

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20107021875

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2010141823

Country of ref document: RU

Ref document number: 2009762990

Country of ref document: EP

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: PI0909299

Country of ref document: BR

Kind code of ref document: A2

Effective date: 20100913

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 247136

Country of ref document: IL